service manual aution max ax-4030

339
AUTION MAX TM AX-4030 Service manual ARKRAY, Inc.

Upload: aproragadozo

Post on 24-Oct-2014

2.229 views

Category:

Documents


224 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AUTION MAXTM

AX-4030

Service manual

ARKRAY, Inc.

Page 2: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Introduction

AUTION MAX ™ AX-4030 was manufactured under strict quality control conditions. It is a highly-accurate

instrument so if the quality of just one of its many parts deteriorates, you will not be able to obtain reliable results. It is

a high-precision instrument so usage problems will also have a large impact on measurement results. In the event that

instrument failure occurs due to this, please refer to the user manual in conjunction with this service manual and take

appropriate action.

Caution!!

This service manual has been prepared for specially trained service engineers. If you are not such a person, please refrain from using this manual. In the event that an unqualified person performs servicing, ARKRAY, Inc. will accept no liability and warranties for all instruments will be invalidated.

Page 3: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Content

Introduction

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer 1. FEATURES 2 2.SPECIFICATIONS 4 3.MEASUREMENT PRINCIPLE 6 4.APPEARANCE SKETCH 11

Chapter 2 System Configuration 1.ASSEMBLY FLOWCHART 2 2.DEVELOPMENT DRAWING 5 3.DIAGRAM 55 4.TUBING SYSTEM DIAGRAM 56 5.OPERATION SEQUENCE CHART 58

Chapter 3 Operation of Service mode 1.OVERVIEW 22.ENTERING AND EXITING THE SERVICE MODE 23.CONFIGURING THE INSTRUMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS 8

Chapter 4 Circuit diagram 1.Circuit diagram

Chapter 5 Standard inspection 1.PURPOSE 1 2.SCOPE OF APPLICATION 1 3.TEST ITEMS 1 4.INSPECTION CONTENT AND PASSING CRITERIA 3

Chapter 6 Adjustments 1.ADJUSTMENT ITEMS, TOOLS AND SUPPLIES (MAIN BODY) 2 2.ADJUSTMENTS (MAIN BODY) 3 3.SAMPLER ADJUSTMENT ITEMS, JIGS AND SUPPLIES (SAMPLER) 52 4.SAMPLER ADJUSTMENTS 53 5.BARCODE READER ADJUSTMENTS 62

Appendix

Page 4: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AX-4030 Service Manual

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer

1. Outline of AX - 4030 1. Features ............................................................................................................................... 2 2. Specifications ....................................................................................................................... 4 3. Measurement Principle......................................................................................................... 6 4. Appearance sketch ............................................................................................................. 11

1-1

Page 5: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer AX-4030 Service Manual

1. Features ■ Easy to operate

Daily measurements are done in three easy steps: [1] load the test strips, [2] load the samples and [3] press the

start key. After pressing the start key, the instrument automatically performs the entire series of operations to

effectuate measurement: test strip picking, sample transport, sample aspiration, test strip staining,

measurement, and test strip disposal.

■ Test strip staining used

After aspirating sample with a nozzle, the instrument stains each reagent pad on the test strip with a small

quantity of sample. Measurements can be performed as long as there is at least 2 mL of sample in the sample

tube.

■ Dual test strip feeders for multiple test strips

The instrument has two feeders, therefore two types of often used test strips can be loaded in the instrument at

all times. When using the supplied item racks, test strips can be automatically picked from the feeder assigned

to the item racks so as to expedite measurement. This reduces the hassles of changing test strips in/out and

makes measurement work more efficient.

■ Large color LCD

A large color LCD makes measurement conditions and menu settings easy to read and identify, which

facilitates operation. If a warning occurs such as test strips or solution running out, remedial action is

displayed in English so that the situation can be quickly corrected.

■ Thermal compensation

The best temperature range for measurements is 20 - 25°C, but some measurement items may not yield correct

results if visually evaluated outside of this range. Therefore, the thermal compensation feature of this

instrument minimizes errors caused by temperature changes within a 10 - 30°C range to deliver correct

measurement results.

■ General diagnostics support

Samples are measured according to color, turbidity and abnormal coloration detection. These capabilities

eliminate the need for visual evaluation and provide useful information for basing evaluations on printed

results.

Color-tone measurement

The instrument examines the color of the sample by measuring contrast and hue. It evaluates samples against

23 colors (see page 1-00).

Turbidity measurement

The instrument measures turbidity and evaluates samples as “clear”, “turbid” or “dense turbid”.

Abnormal coloration detection

The instrument automatically detects false positive reactions of reagent pads caused by drug-administered

urine and notifies you by adding a “!” to printed measurement results.

■ Memory capacity for measurement results of 2,500 samples

Measurement results for a total of 2,500 samples, between normal measurements and STAT measurements,

can be stored in memory. These results can be displayed, printed and sent to an external device as necessary.

As new data is recorded above 2,500 samples, the old data is sequentially deleted. Up to 200 control

1-2

Page 6: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer AX-4030 Service Manual

measurements, 50 check measurements and 100 troubles can be logged.

■ Management by barcode possible

Measurement results can be managed by ID using an optional barcode reader (built-in or hand-held type). If

a barcode label is affixed to the sample tube ahead of time, the barcode is read during measurement and

assigned to the measurement results as an ID.

■ 2-way/1-way online communications

The instrument can be connected to an external device for 2-way or 1-way communications. It can operate

as a component in an online network configuration

1-3

Page 7: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer AX-4030 Service Manual

2. Specifications Specifications

Product : AUTION MAX AX-4030

Configuration : Instrument, sampler, and accessories

Sample : Urine

Reagent : AUTION MAX test strips

Instrument specifications

Measurement items : GLU (Glucose), PRO (Protein), BIL (bilirubin),

URO (Urobilinogen), PH (pH), BLD (Blood), KET (Ketones),

NIT (Nitrite), LEU (Leukocytes), CRE (Creatinine),

P/C (Protein-to-Creatinine ratio), S.G. (Specific gravity),

turbidity, and color tone

Measurement range : Test strip: Each item has different ranks.

S.G.: 1.000 to 1.050 (Resolution: 0.001)

Color tone: See the table on 3.Measurement principle.

Turbidity: Three levels including “clear”, “turbid”, and

“excessively turbid”

Measurement method : Test strip: Dual-wavelength reflectance measurement

(Single wavelength for BLD)

S.G.: Reflection refractometry

Color tone: Light-transmission measurement

Turbidity: Light-scattering measurement

Measurement wavelength : 5 LED wavelengths (430, 500, 565, 635, 760 nm)

Sample supply : Sampler

Test strip reaction : About 60 seconds

Test strip storage : Two test strip storage compartments, each of which can contain

different test strips

Test strip storage capacity : Max. 200 test strips × two storage compartments

Processing speed : 225 sample/hour

Sample consumption : 0.90 mL

Required sample volume : Min. 2.0 mL

Sample container : Sample tubes manufactured by Ono Pharmaceutical Co., LTD. or

Equivalent

Applicable racks : ARKRAY racks

Sample loading capacity : One-way feeding (default): Max. 50 samples

Loop feeding: Max. 100 samples

Warm-up time : Max. 2 minutes

Display : Large color liquid crystal display (320 × 240 dots)

Built-in printer : 58-mm width thermal printer paper (24 digits)

1-4

Page 8: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer AX-4030 Service Manual

Memory capacity : Normal and STAT measurement: 2500 tests

Control measurement: 200 tests

Check measurement: 20 tests

Trouble list: 100 tests

External output : 2 ports

(One of these ports can be optionally used as an Ethernet port.)

Communication system : Compliant with RS-232C

(Switchable between one-way and two-way)

Transmission speed : RS-232C: Selectable from 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps

Ethernet: 10BASE-T

Thermal compensation : Supported

Operating environment : Temperature: 10 - 30°C; Humidity: 20 - 80% RH

(Non-condensing)

Measurement environment : Temperature: 10 - 30°C; Humidity: 30 - 60% RH

(Non-condensing)

Storage environment : Temperature: 10 - 30°C; Humidity: 20 - 80% RH

(Non-condensing)

Dimensions : 530 (W) × 530 (D) × 530 (H) mm

Weight : Instrument: approx. 31 kg, Sampler: approx. 4 kg

DC power requirements : 100 - 240 V AC, 50 - 60 Hz

(to instrument)

Power input : Max. 300 VA

Site location : For indoor use only

Altitude : 2000 m

Pollution degree : 2

Over voltage category : II

Expected life : 5 years from first use (installation) of instrument (According to

company data)

1-5

Page 9: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer AX-4030 Service Manual

3. Measurement Principle This instrument measures purpose-specific test strips by dual-wavelength reflectance measurement (single

wavelength for BLD) and urine specific gravity (S. G.) by reflection refractometry.

This section explains the principles for measuring “test strips”, “specific gravity”, “color” and “turbidity”.

Test Strip Measurement

Test strips loaded in the feeder are sent one at a time to the tray inside the instrument and carried to the sample

staining position by the introduction arm. At the sample staining position, the nozzle that aspirated the sample

from the sample tube in the sampler stains each reagent pad (each measurement item) of the test strip. Once

stained, the test strip is transported to the optical block.

Within about 60 sec of staining, the test strip reacts and changes color, therefore its reflectivity is measured in

that moment. When measurement has been completed, the test strip is discarded in the waste box.

The measurement unit irradiates the reagent pad with light of 2 wavelengths from a 5-wavelength LED, the

reflected light of which is picked up by a single detector *. Moreover, by measuring the reflectivity of the color

correction pad of the test strip, destabilizing factors such as the amount of reflected light and colored samples are

corrected.

* The irradiated wavelength combinations differ according to measurement item.

Wavelengths by measurement item

Reflectivity is measured with the following formula.

R = (Tm • Cs) / (Ts • Cm)

R : Reflectivity

Tm : Amount of reflected light coming from reagent pad at measurement wavelength

Ts : Amount of reflected light coming from reagent pad at standard wavelength

Cm : Amount of reflected light coming from color correction pad at measurement wavelength

Cs : Amount of reflected light coming from color correction pad at standard wavelength

However, BLD is measured with only one wavelength and calculated with the below formula.

R = Tm / Cm

1-6

Page 10: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer AX-4030 Service Manual

P/C is measured and calculated with the below formula.

RP/C = (100 – RPRO) / RCRE

These reflectivities “R” are compared against calibration curves stored in the instrument and output as

measurement results. Also, temperature is corrected to eliminate changes caused by environmental temperature.

Specific Gravity (S. G.) Measurement

Specific gravity of a urine sample is obtained by measuring the refraction of the sample using a prism and

subjecting results to a calculation formula (reflection refractometry). The light from an LED passes through the

prism and is reflected on the prism face contacting the sample. The light reflected off the prism is collimated into

a thin beam by passing through a slit and directed to a detector (CCD image sensor). At this point, the refractive

index at the interface between the prism face and sample will change according to the specific gravity, therefore

the position of the incident light from the slit will change. The refractive index is obtained by detecting the

position of the incident light and, after correcting it for temperature effects, it is converted into a Brix value. The

specific gravity of the sample is then obtained using this Brix value and a conversion formula.

Specific gravity is calculated as follows.

1. The specific gravity of the sample is calculated.

SGx´ = 1 + (4/900) * Brix value

(However, specific gravity is equal to 1,000 if the Brix value is below 0.)

2. Correction coefficients a and b are calculated from the low and high specific gravity values obtained

from S. G. calibration.

a = SGL – SGH

KL – KH

b = SGL – (a × KL)

1-7

Page 11: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer AX-4030 Service Manual

3. The obtained specific gravity value of the sample is corrected using correction coefficients a and b.

SGx = a × SGx´ + b

SGx : Sample’s specific gravity after calibration correction

SGx´ : Sample’s specific gravity before calibration correction

SGH : Specific gravity reference of standard solution (high)

SGL : Specific gravity reference of standard solution (low)

KH : Specific gravity of standard solution (high)

KL : Specific gravity of standard solution (low)

Furthermore, high concentrations of glucose (GLU) and protein (PRO) will affect specific gravity. Therefore,

specific gravity is corrected using the concentrations of glucose and protein obtained from test strip measurement.

SG = SGx – CGLU – CPRO

SG : Specific gravity after GLU and PRO correction

SGx : Specific gravity obtained from formula 3.

CGLU : Corrected GLU value

CPRO : Corrected PRO value

Correction values (Unit of concentration : mg/dL)

Color-Tone Measurement

An internal turbidity/color measurement unit measures sample color using transmitted light.

1-8

Page 12: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer AX-4030 Service Manual

In color-tone measurement, red (635 nm), green

(535 nm) and blue (470 nm) lights are irradiated on

the sample in the cylindrical tube and the hue and

contrast of the sample are obtained from the amount

of transmitted light.

The color is evaluated against 23 standard colors

consisting of light, normal and dark shades of yellow,

orange, brown, red, violet, blue and green (21 total),

plus colorless and other.

Hue is obtained from the areas in the coordinate

system at right. Coordinates are calculated with the

below formulas.

1. XVZ stimulus is obtained.

X = ( (a × R) + (b × G) + (c × B) ) ÷ 1000

Y = ( (d × R) + (e × G) + (f × B) ) ÷ 1000

Z = ( (g × G) + (h × B) ) ÷ 1000

R : Transmission intensity of 635 nm light

G : Transmission intensity of 535 nm light

B : Transmission intensity of 470 nm light

a to h : Correction coefficients

2. The x and y color coordinates are obtained from formula

1.

x = X ÷ (X + Y + Z)

y = Y ÷ (X + Y + Z)

3. The density is obtained from formula 2.

(x2 + y2)

1-9

Page 13: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer AX-4030 Service Manual

Turbidity Measurement

An internal turbidity/color measurement unit measures sample turbidity using transmitted and scattered lights

Light of 635 nm is irradiated on the sample in the cylindrical cell and turbidity is calculated using

the below formula.

T : Turbidity

Ss : Scattered light of sample

Ts : Transmitted light of sample

Sw : Scattered light of washing solution

Tw : Transmitted light of washing solution

K : Factory-set instrument coefficient

Turbidity is determined by the obtained T value

* (Level 1) and (Level 2) are constants.

1-10

Page 14: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer AX-4030 Service Manual

4. Appearance sketch Design sketch

1-11

Page 15: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AX-4030 Service Manual

Chapter 2 System Configuration

1. Assembly Flowchart .................................................................................................................... 2 2. Development Drawing ................................................................................................................. 5

1) Main body assembly .........................................................................................................................5 2) Rear Panel Assembly .......................................................................................................................7 3) Main Body Frame Assembly (Right Side) ........................................................................................8 4) Main Body Frame Assembly (Left Side) .........................................................................................10 5) Front Panel Assembly.....................................................................................................................13 6) Test Strip Feeder Section Assembly ..............................................................................................14 7) Feeder Upper Portion Assembly ....................................................................................................16 8) Drum Unit Assembly .......................................................................................................................17 9) Feeder Lower Portion Assembly ....................................................................................................18 10) Pump Section Assembly.............................................................................................................19 11) Pump Unit ...................................................................................................................................20 12) Test Strip Identification Section Assembly .................................................................................21 13) Drain Tubing Assembly...............................................................................................................23 14) Air Pump Assembly.....................................................................................................................24 15) Test Strip Introduction Section Assembly...................................................................................25 16) Interlock Assembly(B.LID) ..........................................................................................................26 17) Feeder Cover Anchoring Section Assembly...............................................................................27 18) Interlock Assembly(R).................................................................................................................28 19) Operation Section Assembly ......................................................................................................29 20) Washing Bath Assembly.............................................................................................................30 21) S.G. and Turbidity Optical Unit Assembly ..................................................................................31 22) Printer assembly .........................................................................................................................33 23) Nozzle Drive Assembly...............................................................................................................34 24) Up-and-down Drive Assembly ....................................................................................................36 25) Sampler sub-CPU assembly.......................................................................................................38 26) Test Strip Reaction Section Assembly .......................................................................................39 27) Test Strip Optical Unit Assembly ................................................................................................40 28) Test Strip Transport Section Assembly ......................................................................................42 29) Tubing Base Assembly ...............................................................................................................44 30) Base Plate Box A Assembly .......................................................................................................45 31) Base Plate Box B assembly........................................................................................................46 32) Power Box Assembly ..................................................................................................................48 33) Interlock Assembly(F) .................................................................................................................49 34) Sample Supply Section Assembly ..............................................................................................50 35) Chassis Assembly.......................................................................................................................52 36) Top Base Right Assembly ..........................................................................................................53 37) Top Base Left Assembly.............................................................................................................54

3. Diagram....................................................................................................................................... 55 4. Tubing System Diagram ............................................................................................................ 56

1) Tubing System Parts List................................................................................................................56 2) Tubing System Diagram .................................................................................................................57

5. Operation Sequence Chart ........................................................................................................ 58

2-1

Page 16: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

1. Assembly Flowchart

Main body assembly Sampler

Main body frame assembly

Sample supply section assembly

Interlock assembly (F) Chassis assembly

Interlock assembly (R)

Interlock assembly (B.LID)

Feeder cover anchoring plate assembly

Top base right assembly

Interlock sensor assembly

Top base left assembly

Power box assembly

Base plate Box B assembly

Sampler sub-CPU assembly

Waste box assembly

Nozzle drive assembly

Up-and-down drive assembly

Test strip reaction section assembly

Test strip transport section assembly

Chuck section assembly

Test strip optical unit assembly

Optical block assembly

Base plate Box A assembly

Tubing base assembly

Manifold (pump) assembly

S.G. and turbidity optical unit assembly

2-2

Page 17: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual AX-4030 Service Manual

S.G. hydrometer base assembly

S.G. and turbidity flow cell assembly

Flow cell assembly (bonded)

Turbidity detector assembly

Printer assembly

Drain tubing assembly

Air pump assembly

Test strip introduction section assembly

Arm assembly

Test strip identification section assembly

Pump section assembly

Pump unit

Decompression bottle assembly

Test strip feeder section assembly

Drum unit assembly

Lower portion assembly (Feeder)

Drum motor assembly

Reverse drum motor assembly

Upper portion assembly (Feeder)

Eject section assembly

Washing bath assembly

Bottle sensor printed board assembly

2-3

Page 18: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

stem Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual AX-4030 Service

2-4

Bridge connection printed circuit board

RS-232C printed circuit board

Front panel assembly

Sample tube sensor assembly

Nozzle assembly

Operation section assembly

Rear panel assembly

Chapter 2 SyManual

Bottle unit

Page 19: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

2. Development Drawing (1) Main body assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the tubing and wiring detached. Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard

Main body power adjustment Main body pulse adjustment

Calibration for turbidity and Hb measurement- (1)

Unit positioning

2-5

Page 20: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.

Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 1 Bottle unit - - 2 1 Sampler - - 3 1 Main body frame assembly - - 4 1 Upper cover assembly - - 5 1 Feeder protective cover assembly - - 6 1 Side cover assembly - -

1 Center panel - - 7 2 Cross recessed head screws with

captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Left side panel assembly - - 8 2 Cross recessed head screws with

captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

9 1 Front cover assembly - - 10 1 Bottle tray lid assembly - -

1 Rear panel assembly - -

2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) M3x10 SUS - - 11

9 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

2-6

Page 21: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(2) Rear Panel Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1) (2) -

Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 1 Fan motor wiring 96565 1 2 1 Finger guard F80UL guard - -

3 4 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) M3x10 SUS - -

4 4 Hexagon nuts M3 SUS - -

2-7

Page 22: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(3) Main Body Frame Assembly (Right Side)

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the tubing and wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard Main body power adjustment Main body pulse adjustment

Calibration for turbidity and Hb measurement (1) (3)

Unit positioning

2-8

Page 23: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 Front panel assembly 96606 1 1

4 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) (small) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Test strip feeder assembly 96570 1 2 3 Cross recessed head screws with

captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

3 1 Introduction tray 80073 1 1 Arm assembly 96576 1

4 2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) (small) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Anchoring plate assembly - - 5 2 Cross recessed head screws with

captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

6 1 Decompression bottle assembly 96608 1 1 Pump section assembly - -

7 4 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Identification section cover - - 8 3 Cross recessed head screws with

captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Test strip identification section assembly 96578 1

2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) M3x8 SUS - - 9

4 Socket screw M2x8 SUS - - 1 Air pump assembly - -

10 2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Drain tubing assembly - - 11 2 Socket screw with captive washer

(sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Feeder hinge base - -

1 Test strip introduction section assembly 96575 1 12

10 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

13 1 Interlock cover - - 1 Interlock assembly (B.LID) - -

14 2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Feeder cover anchoring section assembly - -

15 2 Socket screw with captive washer

(sems) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Interlock assembly(R) - - 16 2 Cross recessed head screws with

captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

2-9

Page 24: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(4) Main Body Frame Assembly (Left Side)

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the tubing and wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard Main body power adjustment Main body pulse adjustment

Calibration for turbidity and Hb measurement(1) and then (3) (4)

Unit positioning

2-10

Page 25: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 Antirotation block - - 1

1 Socket screw with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x10 SUS - -

2 1 Nozzle assembly 96590 1 3 1 Transport tray 80074 1

1 Operation section assembly 96569 1 4 3 Cross recessed head screws with

captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Washing bath assembly 96604 1 5 2 Socket screw with captive washer

(sems)(small) M3x10 SUS - -

1 Operation section reinforcing panel assembly - -

6 3 Socket screw with captive washer

(sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

1 S.G. and turbidity optical unit assembly 96593 1

2 Socket screw with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - - 7

2 Socket screw with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x10 SUS - -

1 Base plate cover - -

3 Socket screw with captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - - 8

1 Urea screw M3x6 No.1, white - - 1 Printer assembly - -

9 3 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Nozzle drive assembly 96587 1 3 Socket screw M3x8 SUS - - 10 2 Socket screw with captive washer

(sems)(small) M3x10 SUS - -

1 Sampler sub-CPU assembly - - 11 2 Socket screw with captive washer

(sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Test strip reaction section assembly 96580 1 12 4 Socket screw with captive washer

(sems)(small) M4x10 SUS - -

1 Waste box assembly - - 13 2 Socket screw with captive washer

(sems) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Tubing base assembly - -

1 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - - 14

2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x10 SUS - -

1 Base plate Box A assembly - - 15 4 Cross recessed head screws with

captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Base plate Box B assembly - - 16 6 Cross recessed head screws with

captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

2-11

Page 26: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

1 Power box assembly - - 17

5 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Bottle sensor printed board assembly - -

18 2 Cross recessed head screws with

captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

1 RS-232C printed circuit board - - 19 2 Cross recessed head screws with

captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Bridge connection printed circuit board 96623 1

20 2 Cross recessed head screws with

captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Interlock assembly (F) - - 21 2 Cross recessed head screws with

captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

2-12

Page 27: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(5) Front Panel Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1) and then (3) (5) Sample tube sensor positioning

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 4 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

2 1 White plate removal panel - -

3 2 Socket screw with captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

4 1 Sample tube sensor holder - -

5 2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x8 SUS - -

6 1 Sensor wiring 96607 1 7 1 Aperture plate - -

1 BCR bracket - - 8 3 Cross recessed head screws with

captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

2-13

Page 28: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(6) Test Strip Feeder Section Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard Reflection system sensors positioning (1) and then (3) (6)

Belt tension adjustment

2-14

Page 29: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 1 Eject section assembly - - 1 Wiring cover - -

2 2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Base plate cover - - 3 5 Cross recessed head screws with

captive washer (sems)(small) M3x8 SUS - -

1 Upper portion assembly - -

4 Socket screw with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x8 SUS - - 4

4 Socket screw with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x16 SUS - -

5 1 Drum unit assembly - - 6 1 Lower portion assembly - -

1 Shutter (0) - - 7 2 Cross recessed head screws with

captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

4 PI printed circuit board 96632 1 8 8 Round head screw M3x4 SUS - - 9 1 Power grip GT belt 184-2GT-4 - -

10 1 Power grip GT belt 128-2GT-4 - -

2-15

Page 30: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(7) Feeder Upper Portion Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing unit with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1), (3), and then (6) (7) -

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 3 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

2 2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x10 SUS - -

3 2 Switch wiring 96572 1

2-16

Page 31: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(8) Drum Unit Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1), (3), and then (6) (8) Reflection system sensors positioning

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 4 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) M3x16 SUS - -

2 4 Reflection system sensors assembly 96571 1

2-17

Page 32: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(9) Feeder Lower Portion Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1), (3), and then (6) (9) -

r [NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 9 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

2 1 Base assembly - - 3 1 Motor holder (RD) - -

4 2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M2.5x6 SUS - -

5 3 Socket set screw M3x4 S (black) WP - - 6 1 Drive pulley A - - 7 1 Motor wiring 96574 1 8 1 Pulley (2GT-18) - - 9 1 Motor wiring 96573 1

2-18

Page 33: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(10) Pump Section Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the tubing and wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1) and then (3) (10) -

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 3 Socket screw with captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

2 1 Pump unit 96601 1

3 4 Socket screw with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x8 SUS - -

4 1 Fan motor wiring 96567 1

2-19

Page 34: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(11) Pump Unit

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the tubing and wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1), (3), and then (10) (11) -

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 8 Socket screw with captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

2 2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M2x12 SUS - -

3 1 Valve wiring 96600 1 4 1 Sampling pump 96603 1 5 1 Washing solution pump 96602 1 6 4 Φ3 PEEK joint 96614 1

2-20

Page 35: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(12) Test Strip Identification Section Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard Belt tension adjustment (1) and then (3) (12)

Reflection system sensors positioning

2-21

Page 36: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 2 Socket screw with captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

2 1 Detector cover - -

3 2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x16 SUS - -

4 2 Reflection system sensors assembly 96571 1

5 9 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

6 1 Coated clip CS-1U - -

7 2 Test strip identification section relayprinted circuit board 96628 1

8 1 PI printed circuit board 96632 1 9 2 Socket set screw M3x4 S (black) WP - -

10 1 Pulley (2GT-18) - - 11 1 Stepping motor 96579 1 12 1 Power grip GT belt 502-2GT-4 - -

2-22

Page 37: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(13) Drain Tubing Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the tubing and wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1) and then (3) (13) -

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 1 Pump wiring 96568 1

2 6 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) M3x10 SUS - -

3 1 Pinch valve joint anchoring plate - - 4 2 Mini fitting For VFI226 2.5-2.5 96634 1 5 2 Valve wiring - - 6 1 Mini fitting For VFT236 2.5x2-3.0 96613 1 7 2 Mini fitting For VFI346 3.0-4.0 96633 1

2-23

Page 38: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(14) Air Pump Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the tubing and wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1) and then (3) (14) -

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 4 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

2 1 Pump wiring - - 3 1 Air pump cover - -

2-24

Page 39: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(15) Test Strip Introduction Section Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1) and then (3) (15) Belt tension adjustment

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 4 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

2 4 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

3 1 Motor assembly (bonded) 96577 1 4 1 Power grip GT belt 460-2GT-4 - - 5 2 Round head screw M3x4 SUS - - 6 1 PI printed circuit board 96632 1

7 1 Test strip introduction drive assembly - -

2-25

Page 40: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(16) Interlock Assembly(B.LID)

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1) and then (3) (16) -

Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) (small) M2x8 SUS - -

2 1 Interlock wiring 96612 1

2-26

Page 41: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(17) Feeder Cover Anchoring Section Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard

(1) and then (3) (17) Outer cover open-closed detectors positioning

Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

2 2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M2x8 SUS - -

3 1 Interlock wiring 96611 1

2-27

Page 42: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(18) Interlock Assembly(R)

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1) and then (3) (18) -

Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M2x8 SUS - -

2 1 Interlock wiring 96610 1

2-28

Page 43: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(19) Operation Section Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1) and then (4) (19) -

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 6 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

2 1 Panel relay printed circuit board 96629 1 3 1 VR printed circuit board 96627 1

2-29

Page 44: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(20) Washing Bath Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the tubing and wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1), (3), and then (4) (20) -

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 1 Adapter fitting VFM6206 - -

2 1 O ring Wire diameterφ1.6 - inner diameterφ2.0 (fluorine) 96605 1

2-30

Page 45: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(21) S.G. and Turbidity Optical Unit Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the tubing and wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1) and then (4) (21) -

2-31

Page 46: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 2 Socket screw with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

2 1 Mounting hardware - -

3 2 Socket screw with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x10 SUS - -

4 1 Valve wiring - - 5 1 Flow cell assembly (bonded) 96596 1 6 1 Elliptic rubber packing 96597 1

7 2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M2x10 SUS - -

8 1 Turbidity detector assembly 96595 1

9 6 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

10 1 Head amplifier cover - - 11 2 Stainless spacer BSU-335 - - 12 2 Spring lock washer M3 SUS - - 13 5 Coated clip CS-1U - - 14 1 S.G. hydrometer base assembly 96594 1

2-32

Page 47: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(22) Printer assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the tubing and wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard

(1) and then (4) (22) -

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching the printer relay printed circuit board. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 2 Socket screw with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

2 1 Printer relay printed circuit board 96631 1 3 4 P tight M3x8 S (Zn) - - 4 1 Paper cutter - - 5 1 Eject button - -

6 3 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M2x8 SUS - -

7 1 Thermal line printer LTPH245 (platen block) - -

2-33

Page 48: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(23) Nozzle Drive Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1), (3), and then (4) (23) Belt tension adjustment

2-34

Page 49: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

2 1 Nozzle relay printed circuit board 96617 1 3 1 CU joiner EYHCUJ1.25-32G700-7S5W 96591 1

4 6 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

5 1 Liquid level cover - - 6 1 Up-and-down drive assembly - - 7 1 Motor wiring 96588 1 8 2 Socket set screw M3x4 S (black) WP - - 9 1 Pulley (P20-2GT) - -

10 1 Power grip GT belt 690-2GT-6 - -

2-35

Page 50: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(24) Up-and-down Drive Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard

(1), (3), (4), and then (23) (24) Belt tension adjustment

2-36

Page 51: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 1 CU joiner EYFCUJ1.0-8G300-7S5W 96592 1 2 6 Round head screw M3x4 SUS - - 3 3 PI printed circuit board 96632 1

4 1 Socket screw with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

5 1 Belt presser foot - -

6 7 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M2.5x6 SUS - -

7 2 Socket set screw M3x4 S (black) WP - - 8 1 Pulley (P20-2GT) - - 9 1 5-phase stepping motor 96589 1

10 4 Socket screw with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x8 SUS - -

11 1 Liquid sensor printed circuit board assembly 96616 1

12 1 Power grip GT belt 460-2GT-4 - -

2-37

Page 52: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(25) Sampler sub-CPU assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1) and then (4) (25) -

[NOTE] Be careful of the connector when detaching the sampler sub-CPU printed circuit board. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 5 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

2 1 Sampler sub-CPU printed circuit board 96615 1

2-38

Page 53: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(26) Test Strip Reaction Section Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1), (3), and then (4) (26) -

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 8 Socket screw with captive washer (sems) M3x6 SUS - -

2 1 Test strip disposal guide - -

3 1 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x14 SUS - -

4 1 Photo reflector - - 5 1 P tight M3x8 S(Zn) - - 6 1 Reaction section cover - - 7 1 Test strip optical unit assembly 96583 1

8 4 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

9 1 Test strip transport section assembly 96581 1

2-39

Page 54: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(27) Test Strip Optical Unit Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1), (3), (4), and then (26) (27) -

2-40

Page 55: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 1 CU joiner EYFCUJ1.0-26G500-15S5W 96586 1 2 3 P tight M3x8 S(Zn) - - 3 2 Countersunk head screw M3x6 SUS - -

4 1 Optical system base (R), additional working - -

5 1 Optical block assembly 96584 1 6 1 PI printed circuit board 96632 1

7 3 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x12 SUS - -

8 2 Socket set screw M3x4 S (black) WP - - 9 1 Pulley (2GT-18) - -

10 4 Round head screw M2.5X4 SUS - - 11 4 Spring lock washer M2.5 SUS - - 12 1 Motor holder - - 13 1 Motor wiring 96585 1

14 1 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x14 SUS - -

15 1 Photo reflector - - 16 1 Timing belt 336-2GT-4 - -

2-41

Page 56: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(28) Test Strip Transport Section Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1), (3), (4), and then (26) (28) -

2-42

Page 57: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 2 Round head screw M3X4 SUS - - 2 1 PI printed circuit board 96632 1

3 8 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

4 1 Transport section bracket - - 5 4 P tight M3x8 S(Zn) - - 6 1 Outer base - - 7 1 Guide plate - - 8 1 Chuck section assembly - - 9 1 Right-left arm - -

10 1 OILES #80 flange bush 80F-0303 - - 11 1 Pushup plate - - 12 3 Socket set screw M3x4 S (black) WP - - 13 1 Cam - - 14 1 PI shutter - - 15 1 E-shaped retaining ring φ4 (SUS) - - 16 1 Shutter holder - - 17 1 OILES #80 bush 80B-0608 - - 18 2 Socket set screw M4x4 S (black) WP - - 19 2 Stainless spur gear S50SU40B+0506 - - 20 1 Motor shaft - - 21 1 Motor base - - 22 1 Motor wiring 96582 1

2-43

Page 58: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(29) Tubing Base Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the tubing and wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1) and then (4) (29) -

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x20 SUS - -

2 1 Manifold (pump) assembly 96598 1 3 1 Valve wiring 96599 1 4 1 Valve wiring 96600 1

2-44

Page 59: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(30) Base Plate Box A Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard

(1) and then (4) (30) -

[NOTE] Be careful of the connector when detaching each base plate. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 8 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

2 1 Panel sub-CPU printed circuit board 96626 1 3 1 Main CPU printed circuit board 96619 1

2-45

Page 60: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(31) Base Plate Box B assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1) and then (4) (31) -

2-46

Page 61: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connector when detaching each base plate. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 2 Socket screw with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Nozzle driver base plate - - 2 2 Socket screw with captive washer

(sems)(small) M3x8 SUS - -

1 Nozzle driver printed circuit board 96618 1 3 4 Cross recessed head screws with

captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Qualitative analysis machine driver printed circuit board 96622 1

4 4 Cross recessed head screws with

captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Qualitative analysis machine AD sub-CPU printed circuit board 96621 1 5

4 Stainless spacer BSU-330 - - 2 PMC sub-CPU printed circuit board 96620 1 4 Stainless spacer BSU-330 - - 6 4 Cross recessed head screws with

captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

2-47

Page 62: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(32) Power Box Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached..

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1) and then (4) (32) -

[NOTE] Be careful of the connector when detaching Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 Power supply relay printed circuit board 96624 1

1 6 Cross recessed head screws with

captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6 SUS - -

1 Fan motor wiring 96566 1 2 4 Socket screw with captive washer

(sems)(small) M3x8 SUS - -

2-48

Page 63: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(33) Interlock Assembly(F)

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard (1) and then (4) (33) -

Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M2x8 SUS - -

2 1 Interlock wiring 96609 1

2-49

Page 64: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(34) Sample Supply Section Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard Measurement side lever PI adjustment

Measurement side lever interlock adjustmentSTAT port holder height adjustment

Rack ID sensor sensitivity adjustment (1) (34)

Sensor panel angle adjustment

2-50

Page 65: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] 1. Be careful of the motor wiring and extra wiring when detaching the top base right assembly.

2. Be careful of the motor wiring when detaching the top base left assembly. Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 1 Chassis assembly - - 2 1 Top base right assembly 95345 1 3 1 Top base left assembly 95346 1 4 1 STAT port assembly 95347 1 5 1 Front cover - - 6 1 Side panel (right) - - 7 1 Side panel (left) - - 8 2 Rack presser foot - - 9 1 STAT port cover - -

10 21 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x8(SUS) - -

11 4 Truss screw M3x16(SUS) - - 12 4 Toothed lock washer M3 - -

2-51

Page 66: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(35) Chassis Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard Belt tension adjustment (1) and then (34) (35)

Lateral feed lever angle adjustment

Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 1 Sampler 1 printed board 95348 1 2 1 Sampler 2 printed board 95349 1 3 1 Motor wiring S1 95351 1 4 1 Motor wiring S2 95352 1 5 2 Timing belt 95354 1

6 4 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) M3x6(SUS) - -

2-52

Page 67: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(36) Top Base Right Assembly

[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard Belt tension adjustment Belt snaking adjustment (1) and then (34) (36)

Longitudinal feed pulley height adjustment

Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.1 1 Motor wiring S3 95353 1 2 1 Sampler 3 printed board 95350 1 3 1 Base plate spacer A - - 4 1 Base plate spacer B - - 5 2 Power grip GT belt 95355 1 6 2 P tight M3x8 S(Zn) - - 7 1 P tight M3x10 S(Zn) - - 8 3 Flat washer (round) M3 SUS - - 9 3 O ring IN-3 silicon - -

2-53

Page 68: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(37) Top Base Left Assembly [NOTE] The figure shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure No. Assembly standard

Belt tension adjustment Belt snaking adjustment (1) and then (34) (37)

Longitudinal feed pulley level adjustment

Ref. No. Qty. Part name Model and specifications Code Qty.

1 1 Motor wiring S3 95353 1 2 1 Power grip GT belt 95355 1

2-54

Page 69: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

3. Diagram

光学部試験紙導入部

試験紙搬送部

試験紙フィーダー部

洗浄槽

ノズル駆動部

比重/濁度測定部

検(サ体供給部ンプラー)

ポンプ部

廃液ボトル

バーコードリーダー液面検知 洗浄液ボトル

メインCPU

パネルCPU

シートキー LCD表示部プリンターハンディー

外部出力

バーコードリーダー

PMC

駆動サブCPU

サンプラサブCPUA/DサブCPU

Hand-held barcode readerSheet keys Printer LCD

S.G. and turbidity optical unit

External output

Panel CPU

Driving sub-CPU Main CPU

Test strip feeders A/D sub-CPU PMC Sampler sub-CPU

Introduction section

Nozzle drive section

Pump section

Optical unit Sampler

Transport section

Washing bath

Liquid detection

Washing solution bottle

Barcode reader

Drain bottle

2-55

Page 70: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

4. Tubing System Diagram (1) Tubing System Parts List

Item No. Parts Specification Qty

1 Teflon tube φ1.0Xφ1.6X425 175mm (Nozzle included) 1

1' Silicon tube φ2.0Xφ4.0X160 1 1'' Silicon tube φ2.0Xφ4.0X50 1 2 Silicon tube φ1.15Xφ3.2X110 1 3 Teflon tube φ2.1Xφ3.1±0.05X590 1 4 Teflon tube φ2.1Xφ3.1±0.05X350 1 5 Teflon tube φ2.1Xφ3.1±0.05X140 1 6 Teflon tube φ2.1Xφ3.1±0.05X630 1 7 Silicon tube φ2.0Xφ4.0X690 1 8 Tygon tube 1/16″X3/16″X 1000 1

9 Silicon tube φ2.0Xφ4.0X430 1

10 Silicon tube φ2.0Xφ4.0X350 1 11 Two-way joint VFI226 (2.5-2.5 ID) 2 12 Silicon tube φ2.0Xφ4.0X100 2 13 Three-way joint VFT236 (2.5×2-3.0 ID) 1 14 Silicon tube φ3.0Xφ6.0X540 1 15 Silicon tube φ3.0Xφ6.0X310 1 16 Silicon tube φ3.0Xφ6.0X320 1 17 Silicon tube φ3.0Xφ6.0X450 1 18 Two-way joint VFI246(3.0-4.0 ID) 2 19 PharMed tube φ4.76Xφ8.0(X135) 1 20 Silicon tube φ3.0Xφ6.0X500 1 21 Silicon tube φ3.0Xφ6.0X1000 1 22 Silicon tube φ7.0Xφ10X400 1

2-56

Page 71: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

(2) Tubing System Diagram

SUSパイプ

SUSパイプ

NO

洗浄液

2L

廃液3L

パルサーポンプ

Air

点着ポンプ

最大吸引量:236

洗浄液ポンプ

最大吸引量:4962μL

NC

NCNO

V3

V4

点着バルブ

吸引バルブ

V1 セキ止めバル

V2

NC

NO

エアバルブ

ルドレインボト

排出

15

16

17

20

21

1818

Was

hing

so

lutio

n 2

L

エアセグループ部分

エアポンプ

19

2

3

4

5

67

8

Dra

in b

ottle

Dra

in 3

L

Pul

ser p

ump

Air

S

uctio

n pi

pe

Air

valv

e

SU

S p

ipe

SU

S p

ipe

Air

segm

ent g

roup

sec

tion

Was

hing

sol

utio

n pu

mp

Max

. suc

tion

vol.

4962

µL

Sam

plin

g va

lve

Sam

plin

g pu

mp

Max

. suc

tion

vol.

236

µL

Dam

val

ve

Dis

char

ge

Air

pum

p

オーバーフ

ロー

洗浄槽

比重計

濁度計

V5ドレインバルブ

13

9

12

V6

オーバーフローバル

1

14

11

10

221'

12111''

Was

hing

bat

h

Dra

in v

alve

Ove

rflow

Ove

rflow

val

ve

S.G

. met

er

Turb

idity

m

eter

2-57

Page 72: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

2-58

5. Operation Sequence Chart

3

AX-4030 シーケンスタイムチャート:STAT測定、最低検体量時

文書番号:AX-4030-C-43A-07

0.000

2.000

4.000

6.000

8.000

10.000

12.000

14.000

16.000

Doc

. No.

: AX

-403

0-C

-43A

-073

S

eque

nce

time

char

t: S

TAT

mea

sure

men

t with

Min

. sam

ple

volu

me

洗浄槽

Was

hing

13mm上

13 m

m u

p

8mm上

8mm上

8 m

m u

p 8

mm

up

原点

Orig

in

洗浄底

Botto

m o

f w

ashi

ng b

ath

5mm上

5 m

m u

p

原点

Orig

in

停止中

Sto

p

サンプル読取位置

バックラッシュ取り後

Sam

ple

read

ing

posit

ion

Afte

r tak

ing

back

lash

黒マーカー読取後

Afte

r rea

ding

bla

ck m

arke

r 測光部

Opt

ical

Uni

t

原点

Orig

in

黒マーカー読取開始位

Blac

k m

arke

r rea

ding

sta

rt

原点

Orig

in

サンプルスキャン後(試験紙先)

Afte

r sam

ple

scan

ning

(tip

of t

est s

trip)

駆動中

Driv

ing

搬送部

Tran

spor

t sec

tion

閉(OFF)

Clo

sed

(OFF

)

開(ON)

Ope

n (O

N)

閉(OFF)

Clo

sed

(OFF

)

ノズル上下

洗浄ポンプ

原点

排 吸

点着ポンプ

原点

排 吸

V1

V2

V3

V4

V5

V6

閉(ON)

開(OFF)

開(ON)

閉(OFF)

開(ON)

閉(OFF)

開(ON)

閉(OFF)

開(ON)

ノズル前後

STAT

10

87

65

32

サンプル最下位置

エアセグ吸引位置

原点途中位置(液面より引き抜き)洗浄底

プレ上昇位置

5mm上

5 m

m u

p 点着下

点着上

Stai

n: d

own

Stai

n: u

p

洗浄

点着11パッド

Noz

zle

up-d

own

Noz

zle

back

-and

-forth

Was

hing

bat

h

Sam

plin

g pu

mp

Sam

ple

low

est p

ositi

on

Air

segm

ent s

uctio

n po

sitio

n Pre

-risi

ng p

ositi

on To

war

d-or

igin

pos

ition

(Dra

wn

from

liqui

d le

vel)

Botto

m o

f w

ashi

ng b

ath

Orig

in

Orig

in

Was

hing

Disc

harg

e

Disc

harg

e

Suct

ion

Suct

ion C

lose

d (O

N)

Ope

n (O

FF)

Ope

n (O

N)

Clo

sed

(OFF

)

Ope

n (O

N)

Clo

sed

(OFF

)

Ope

n (O

N)

Clo

sed

(OFF

)

Stai

n 11

pad

s

Ope

n (O

N)

Page 73: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 2 System Configuration AX-4030 Service Manual

2-59

Page 74: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Rev. A AX-4030 Service Manual

3-1

Chapter 3 Operation of Service mode

Contents 1. Overview .................................................................................................................................................1

2. Entering and Exiting the Service Mode ...............................................................................................2 2.1. Starting Up the Instrument in the Service Mode ............................................................................2 2.2. Entering the Service Mode from Standby ......................................................................................3 2.3. Exiting the Service Mode ...............................................................................................................3 2.4. Basic Operation: Working with the Menu Screens.........................................................................4 2.5. Basic Operation: Working with the Selection Fields ......................................................................5 2.6. Basic Operation: Working with Numeric Value Entry Fields ..........................................................5 2.7. Confirmation Saving New Settings.................................................................................................7

3. Configuring the Instrument Using the Menu Options ........................................................................8 3.1. Parameter setting ...........................................................................................................................8

3.1.1. Rack assignment for test strip ...........................................................................................8 3.1.2. Result display format .........................................................................................................8 3.1.3. Measurement No. setup ....................................................................................................8 3.1.4. Print order..........................................................................................................................9 3.1.5. Transmit order .................................................................................................................10 3.1.6. Rank type ........................................................................................................................11 3.1.7. Strip item .........................................................................................................................15 3.1.8. Control ID ........................................................................................................................16

3.2. Results .........................................................................................................................................16 3.2.1. Print .................................................................................................................................16 3.2.2. Transmit...........................................................................................................................16 3.2.3. View.................................................................................................................................16 3.2.4. Delete ..............................................................................................................................16 3.2.5. Online test .......................................................................................................................16

3.3. Initial setting .................................................................................................................................17 3.3.1. System clock setup..........................................................................................................17 3.3.2. Printer setup ....................................................................................................................17 3.3.3. External output setup.......................................................................................................18 3.3.4. Beeper volume setting.....................................................................................................19 3.3.5. Barcode ...........................................................................................................................20 3.3.6. Sampler ...........................................................................................................................20 3.3.7. Rack ID............................................................................................................................20 3.3.8. Serial No..........................................................................................................................20 3.3.9. Option ..............................................................................................................................21

3.4. Print ..............................................................................................................................................22 3.4.1. Trouble list .......................................................................................................................22 3.4.2. Abnormal results list ........................................................................................................22 3.4.3. Parameter settings ..........................................................................................................22

3.5. Maintenance.................................................................................................................................23 3.5.1. S.G. cell washout.............................................................................................................23 3.5.2. Clean washing bath and tray...........................................................................................23 3.5.3. Check measurement .......................................................................................................23 3.5.4. Maintenance information .................................................................................................23

3.6. Refresh the setting .......................................................................................................................23 3.6.1. All settings .......................................................................................................................23 3.6.2. Factory setup...................................................................................................................23 3.6.3. Parameter settings ..........................................................................................................23 3.6.4. Initial settings...................................................................................................................23 3.6.5. Chemical system .............................................................................................................23

3.7. System .........................................................................................................................................24 3.7.1. Total counter....................................................................................................................24 3.7.2. Calibration .......................................................................................................................24 3.7.3. Packing mode..................................................................................................................24 3.7.4. Adjustment.......................................................................................................................24 3.7.5. Feeder torque adjust .......................................................................................................30 3.7.6. Detail setting....................................................................................................................30

Page 75: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

1. Overview This document describes service mode operations of the fully automated urine analyzer “AX-4030”. The service mode is open to the ARKRAY-concerned persons including servicemen and factory workers only, but not to the users. The messages in this mode are displayed in English on the models for all countries. The service mode provides the functions listed below. For information on the hierarchical structure of the service mode commands, see the attached document.

Menu items Descriptions Parameter setting Sets measurement related parameters. Results Reviews the results by displaying, printing, or transmitting them to an external device.Initial setting Sets the initial settings of the instrument. Print Prints information on instrument status. Maintenance Performs maintenance of the instrument. Refresh the setting Resets the parameter settings. System Tests or adjusts the mechanical systems, electronic volumes, and other hardware

components.

2. Entering and Exiting the Service Mode This section describes how to enter and exit the service mode and how to work with the menu screens and fields that frequently appear in that mode.

2.1. Starting Up the Instrument in the Service Mode 1. Holding down the [STOP] key, turn on the instrument to access the screen shown below.

Type in “-4030-“ and press OK .

2. The service mode menu screen will appear. Now, the instrument is in the service mode.

Password: <****** > BS OK CANCEL

Menu (0000) 2005-04-25 13:58 1 Measurement condition 2 Result 3 Initial setting 4 Printing 5 Maintenance 6 Refresh the setting 7 System BS OK Back

3-2

Page 76: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

2.2. Entering the Service Mode from Standby 1. Press the [STOP] and [-] keys at the same time. 2. On the screen shown below, type in “-4030-“ and press OK .

3. The service mode menu screen will appear. Now, the instrument is in the service mode.

Password: <****** > BS OK CANCEL

2.3. Exiting the Service Mode

1. On the service mode menu screen, press Back .

Menu (0000) 2005-04-25 13:58 1 Parameter setting 2 Results 3 Initial setting 4 Printing 5 Maintenance 6 Refresh the setting 7 System BS OK Back

1 Parameter setting 2 Results 3 Initial setting 4 Printing 5 Maintenance 6 Refresh the setting 7 System BS OK Back

Menu (0000) 2005-04-25 13:58

3-3

Page 77: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

2. If the instrument has started up under the procedure in “2.1 Starting Up the Instrument in the Service Mode”, the system startup initialization will be carried out, and then the standby screen will appear. [TIP] For information on what appears on the screen at startup, see the operating manual. If the instrument has entered the service mode under the procedure in “2.2 Entering the Service Mode from Standby”, the standby screen will appear.

2.4. Basic Operation: Working with the Menu Screens This section describes the menu screens that frequently appear in the service mode. In later sections, screen names followed by “menu screen” refer to this type of screen.

The available keys are listed below. [1] - [7]: Selects the respective options 1 to 7 shown on the above menu. Back : Exits the menu.

Ready for measurement 2005-04-25 13:58 Measurement start No. 0001 Test strips in feeder 1 1: 10PA Test strips in feeder 2 2: 10EA Menu Meas No. Strip S.G. Cal

1 Parameter setting 2 Results 3 Initial setting 4 Printing 5 Maintenance 6 Refresh the setting 7 System BS OK Back

Menu (0000) 2005-04-25 13:58

3-4

Page 78: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

2.5. Basic Operation: Working with the Selection Fields This section describes the selection fields that frequently appear in the service mode. In later sections, item names followed by “selection field” refer to this type of field. Selectable options appear in brackets ([ ]).

The available keys are listed below. - (hyphen): Displays the next option. While the last option is being displayed, pressing this key returns the

setting back to the first option. ENTER: Moves down to the next setup item. ▲ : Moves up to the previous setup item. OK : Confirms the settings on the screen. If one or more changes have been made, the

confirmation window shown in “2.7 Saving New Settings“ will appear. CANCEL : Aborts the new settings, recovers the previous settings, and goes back to the one level higher

menu screen.

2.6. Basic Operation: Working with Numeric Value Entry Fields This section describes the numeric value entry fields that frequently appear in the service mode. In later sections, item names followed by “entry screen” refer to this type of field. These entry fields can accept numeric values of as many digits as can be typed in angle brackets (< >). There are no numerical limits unless specified next to the field.

Barcode (3500) 2005-04-25 13:58 Use [OFF]Start degit < 1> Read degit <13> Miss Read [Pass]

▲ OK CANCEL

Barcode (3500) 2005-04-25 13:58 Use [OFF] Start degit < 1> Read degit <13> Miss Read [Pass] ▲ BS OK CANCEL

3-5

Page 79: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-6

The available keys are listed below. Numeric keys: Shifts the digit at the ones place to the tens place, and puts the number corresponding to the

pressed numeric key in the ones place. Overflowed digits are deleted. BS : Deletes a digit. - (hyphen): Enters a minus sign.

[TIP] If the field contains “0” or does not accept values smaller than “0”, the [-] key-in action is ignored.

ENTER: Moves down to the next setup item. ▲ : Moves up to the previous setup item. OK : Confirms the settings on the screen. If one or more changes have been made, the confirmation

window shown in “2.7 Saving New Settings“ will appear. CANCEL : Aborts the new settings, recovers the previous settings, and goes back to the one level higher

menu screen.

Page 80: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

2.7. Confirmation Saving New Settings This section describes the confirmation window that frequently appears in the service mode. In later sections, “confirmation window” refers to this type of window. With the confirmation window open, pressing OK saves new settings (writes them in the flash ROM). Pressing CANCEL aborts the new settings and recovers the previous settings (in this case, the new settings are not written in the flash ROM and the previous settings are maintained).

While the settings are being written in the flash ROM, a message window like shown below appears. When writing has been completed, the previous menu screen will appear again.

Barcode (3500) 2005-04-25 13:58 Use [OFF] Start degit < 1> Read degit <13> Miss Read [Pass] ▲ BS OK CANCEL

Save setting changes?

Barcode (3500) 2005-04-25 13:58 Use [OFF] Start degit < 1> Read degit <13> Miss Read [Pass] ▲ BS OK CANCEL

Saving changes・・・ Keep power on.

3-7

Page 81: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-8

3. Configuring the Instrument Using the Menu Options This section describes the options listed in each menu screen. The options on yellow backgrounds can also be accessed in the user mode; therefore, see the operating manual for how to use these options.

3.1. Parameter setting The “Parameter setting” menu provides options mainly used for setting the measurement parameters.

3.1.1. Rack assignment for test strip Select this option to assign a feeder number (1, 2, or main) to each item rack. For more information, see the operating manual.

3.1.2. Result display format Select “Result display format” to set the output format of the measurement results.

Sample

See the operating manual. Control measurement

See the operating manual. JCCLS

Select whether to output the results in JCCLS-compliant print format. The selectable options are listed below. OFF: Does not output in the JCCLS-compliant print format. ON: Outputs in the JCCLS-compliant print format.

3.1.3. Measurement No. setup Select this option to make the settings related to measurement numbers. For more information, see the operating manual.

Page 82: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3.1.4. Print order Select “Print order” to arrange the order of measurement items that appear on the printed result reports. The instructions are described below.

1. On the screen shown below, select the name of the test strip for which to arrange the order of the

measurement items, and press OK . In this example, test strip “10PA” is being selected.

2. Determine the order of each measurement item. Type in the desired order number (2-digit) number in the entry field for each measurement item (in this example, “GLU” is the first and “PRO” is the second). The current page number appears at the upper right of the screen. While the cursor is placed on the lowest line, pressing the ENTER key switches the pages (in this example, with the cursor placed on <09> for “NIT”, pressing the ENTER key proceeds to page 2, and with the cursor placed on <12> for “Turbidity”, pressing the ENTER key returns to page 1).

Page 1 Page 2

+Print order (1400) 2005-04-25 13:58 Strip [10PA] OK CANCEL

+Print order (10PA) (1/2) (1400) 2005-04-25 13:58 GLU <01> PRO <02> URO <03> BIL <04> CRE <05> PH <06> BLD <07> KET <08> NIT <09> OK CANCEL

+Print order (10PA) (2/2) (1400) 2005-04-25 13:58 LEU <10> P/C <11> S.G. <13> Color tone <14> Turbidity <12> OK CANCEL

3-9

Page 83: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

Invalid number entries are informed by messages.

1. Each entry field must contain a different number.

The following example shows invalid settings; the “PRO”, “URO”, and “BLD” entry fields all contain the same number (02).

[TIP] The following message will appear.

2. The entries must be serialized. The following example shows invalid settings; number “7” is skipped.

3. The maximum number must be “14”.

+Print order (10PA) (1/2) (1400) 2005-04-25 13:58 GLU <01> PRO <02> URO <02> BIL <04> CRE <05> PH <06> BLD <02> KET <08> NIT <09> OK CANCEL

Input data is wrong.

+Print order (10PA) (1/2) (1400) 2005-04-25 13:58 GLU <01> PRO <02> URO <03> BIL <04> CRE <05> PH <06> BLD <08> KET <09> NIT <10> OK CANCEL

3.1.5. Transmit order Select “Transmit order” to arrange the order of measurement items to be transmitted to the external device. The instructions are the same as those in “3.1.4.Print order“; however, no change can be made for “S.G.” and “Color tone”.

3-10

Page 84: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-11

3.1.6. Rank type Select “Rank type” to choose a calibration curve. Changing this setting deletes all of the measurement results from the backup RAM. The selectable options are listed below.

None: No calibration curve. This option is selected when all of the parameter settings are

initialized. However, the instrument cannot perform measurement without a calibration curve. This option is for protection; it serves the purpose of ensuring that appropriate shipment destination settings are completed for the instrument. [Default]

AX4030 mg: AX-4030 conventional unit AX4030 SI: AX-4030 SI unit J AX4280 mg: Japan/AX-4280 compatible/conventional unit W AX4280 mg: All countries except Japan/AX-4280 compatible/conventional unit W AX4280 SI: China and others (except Japan)/AX-4280 compatible/SI unit J SA4230 mg: Japan/SA-4230 compatible/conventional unit J SA4220S mg: Japan/SA-4220 compatible/conventional unit M SA4220A mg: M company/SA-4220 compatible/conventional unit M SA4220A SI: M company/SA-4220 compatible/SI unit I AX4280 mg: I company/AX-4280 compatible/conventional unit

The following table lists detailed information on each option.

Options Sales area Rank compatibilityUnit of concentration

Applicable test strips

Remark

1 [AX4030 mg] All countries AX-4030 Conventional (mg/dl) All types

2 [AX4030 SI] All countries AX-4030 SI (mmol/l) All types

3 [J AX4280 mg] Japan AX-4280 (AJ-4270)

Conventional (mg/dl)

10EA, 9EA, 8EA, 7EA, 6EA, 5EA, 4EA,10PA, 9UB, 8UA, 8UB, 7UA, 7UB, 5UA, 5UB, 4UA

4 [W AX4280 mg] All countries except Japan

AX-4280 (AJ-4270)

Conventional (mg/dl)

10EA

Differs from “1” only in the applicable test strips.

5 [W AX4280 SI] China and other countries (except Japan)

AX-4280 (AJ-4270)

SI (mmol/l)

10EA

Same as “4” except that concentration is expressed in “SI”.

6 [J SA4230 mg] Japan SA-4230 Conventional (mg/dl)

9UB, 8UA, 8UB, 7UA, 7UB, 5UA, 5UB, 4UA,10EA

7 [J SA4220S mg] Japan SA-4220 Conventional (mg/dl)

9UB, 8UA, 8UB, 7UA, 7UB, 5UA, 5UB, 4UA,10EA

Rank for Uriflet S specifications

8 [M SA4220A mg] M company SA-4220 Conventional (mg/dl)

9UB

Rank for Uriflet A specifications

9 [M SA4220A SI] M company SA-4220 SI (mmol/l) 9UB

Same as “6” except that concentration is expressed in “SI”.

10 [I AX4280 mg] IRIS AX-4280 (AJ-4270)

Conventional (mg/dl)

9EB

This option differs from “1” only in the applicable test strips.

[TIP] The threshold for each rank is appended after product evaluations.

Page 85: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-12

AX-4030 [AX4030 mg] [AX4030 SI] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

GLU Semiquantitative sign - +- +- 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+ +4 Conventional Conc(mg/dL) 30 50 70 100 150 200 300 500 1000 OVER SI concentration (mmol/L) 1.7 2.8 3.9 5.6 8.3 11 17 28 56 OVER

PRO Semiquantitative sign - +- +- +1 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+ Conventional Conc(mg/dL) 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 600 OVER SI concentration (g/L) 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.0 2.0 3.0 6.0 OVER

BIL Semiquantitative sign - 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 3+ 4+ Conventional Conc(mg/dL) 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 OVER SI concentration (umol/L) 8.5 17 34 50 70 100 140 170 OVER

URO Semiquantitative sign NORMAL 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+ Conventional Conc(mg/dL) 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 12.0 OVER SI concentration (umol/L) 34 50 70 100 140 200 OVER

PH Measurement value 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 BLD Semiquantitative sign - +- 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+

Conventional Conc(mg/dL) 0.03 0.06 0.10 0.20 0.50 1.00 OVER SI Concentration(mg/L) 0.3 0.6 1.0 2.0 5.0 10.0 OVER

KET Semiquantitative sign - +- 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+ 4+ Conventional Conc(mg/dL) 10 20 40 60 80 100 150 OVER SI Concentration(mmol/L) 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 15.0 OVER

NIT Semiquantitative sign - 1+ 2+ LEU Semiquantitative sign -

Concentration(Leu/uL) 25 75 250 500 Conventional Conc(mg/dL) 10 50 100 200 300 OVER CRE

SI Conventional(g/L) 0.1 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 OVER P/C Semiquantitative sign DILUTE NORMAL 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+

Conventional Con(mg/gCr) <80 200 400 >500 OVER SI Concentration(mg/g) <80 200 400 >500 OVER

The shaded ranks are indicated with abnormal marks (the PH ranks are not marked with them). Rev. A Results for “CRE” and “P/C” are obtained only when [J AX4280 mg] is selected. “DILUTE” of “P/C” is indicated with an exclamation mark (!).

Page 86: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-13

AX-4280 [J AX4280 mg] [W AX4280 mg] [W AX4280 SI] [I AX4280 mg] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

GLU Semiquantitative sign NORM

AL +- +- +1 +1 +2 +2 +3 +3 +4 +4

Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 30 50 70 100 150 200 300 500 1000 OVER SI Concentration(mmol/l) 1.7 2.8 3.9 5.6 8.3 11 17 28 56 OVER

PRO Semiquantitative sign - +- +- +1 +1 +1 +2 +2 +3 +3 +4 Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 600 OVER SI Concentration(g/L) 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.0 2.0 3.0 6.0 OVER

BIL Semiquantitative sign - +1 +1 +2 +2 +2 +3 +3 +3 +4 Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 0.5 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 OVER SI Concentration(umol/l) 8.5 17 34 50 70 100 140 170 OVER

URO Semiquantitative sign NORM

AL +1 +1 +2 +2 +3 +3 +4

Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 2 3 4 6 8 12 OVER SI Concentration(umol/l) 34 50 70 100 140 200 OVER

PH Measurement value 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 BLD Semiquantitative sign - +- +1 +1 +2 +2 +3 +3

Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 0.03 0.06 0.1 0.2 0.5 1.0 OVER SI Concentration(mg/l) 0.3 0.6 1.0 2.0 5.0 10.0 OVER

KET Semiquantitative sign - +- +1 +1 +2 +2 +3 +3 +4 +4 Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 10 20 40 60 80 100 150 OVER SI Concentration(mmol/l) 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 OVER

NIT Semiquantitative sign - +1 +2 LEU Semiquantitative sign NEG.

Conventional Conc.(Leu/ul) 25 75 250 500 Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 10 50 100 200 300 OVER CRE

SI Conventional(g/L) 0.1 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 OVER

P/C Semiquantitative sign DILUTE NORMA

L +1 +1 +2 +2

Conventional Con(mg/gCr) <80 200 400 >500 OVER The shaded ranks are indicated with abnormal marks (the PH ranks are not marked with them). Results for “CRE” and “P/C” are obtained only when [J AX4280 mg] is selected. “DILUTE” of “P/C” is indicated with an exclamation mark (!). SA-4230 [J SA4230 mg]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

GLU Semiquantitative sign - +- +- +1 +1 +2 +2 +3 +3 +4 +4 Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 30 50 70 100 150 200 300 500 1000 OVER

PRO Semiquantitative sign - +- +- +1 +1 +1 +2 +2 +3 +3 +4 Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 600 OVER

BIL Semiquantitative sign - +1 +1 +2 +2 +2 +3 +3 +3 +4 Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 OVER

URO Semiquantitative sign NORMAL

+1 +1 +2 +2 +3 +3 +4

Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 12.0 OVER PH Measurement value 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0

BLD Semiquantitative sign - +- +1 +1 +2 +2 +3 +3 Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 0.03 0.06 0.10 0.20 0.50 1.00 OVER

KET Semiquantitative sign - +1 +1 +2 +2 +3 +3 +4 +4 Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 10 20 40 60 80 100 150 OVER

NIT Semiquantitative sign - +1 +2 LEU Semiquantitative sign - +- +1 +2 +3 The shaded ranks are indicated with abnormal marks (the PH ranks are not marked with them).

Page 87: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-14

SA-4220 Uriflet S Specifications [J SA4220S mg] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

GLU Semiquantitative sign - +- +- +1 +1 +2 +2 +3 +3 +4 +4 Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 30 50 70 100 150 200 300 500 1000 ^^^^

PRO Semiquantitative sign - +- +- +1 +1 +1 +2 +2 +3 +3 +4 Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 ^^^^

BIL Semiquantitative sign - +1 +1 +2 +2 +2 +3 +3 +3 +4 Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 ^^^^

URO Semiquantitative sign +- +1 +1 +2 +2 +3 +3 +4 Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 12.0 ^^^^

PH Measurement value 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 BLD Semiquantitative sign - +- +1 +1 +2 +2 +3 +3

Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 0.03 0.06 0.10 0.20 0.50 1.00 ^^^^ KET Semiquantitative sign - +- +1 +1 +2 +2 +3 +3 +4

Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 10 20 30 45 60 80 ^^^^ NIT Semiquantitative sign - +1 +2 LEU Conventional Conc.( /ul) - 25 75 250 500 The shaded ranks are indicated with abnormal marks (the PH ranks are not marked with them). SA-4220 Uriflet A Specifications [M SA4220A mg] [M SA4220A SI]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

GLU Semiquantitative sign - - +- +- +1 +1 +2 +2 +3 +3 +4 +4 Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 0 10 30 50 70 100 150 200 300 500 1000 ^^^^ SI Concentration(mmol/l) 0.0 0.6 1.7 2.8 3.9 5.6 8.3 11.0 17.0 28.0 56.0 ^^^^

PRO Semiquantitative sign - - +- +- +1 +1 +1 +2 +2 +2 +3 +3 +3 +4 Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 0 5 10 20 30 50 70 100 150 200 250 300 400 ^^^^ SI Concentration(g/l) 0.00 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.50 0.70 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 ^^^^

BIL Semiquantitative sign - +- +1 +1 +2 +2 +3 +3 +4 Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 0.0 0.2 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 10.0 ^^^^ SI Concentration(umol/l) 0.0 3.4 8.5 17.0 34.0 70.0 100.0 170.0 ^^^^

URO Semiquantitative sign +- +- +1 +1 +2 +2 +3 +3 +4 Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 0.2 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 12.0 ^^^^ SI Concentration(umol/l) 3.4 17.0 34.0 50.0 70.0 100.0 140.0 200.0 ^^^^

PH Measurement value 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 BLD Semiquantitative sign - +- +1 +1 +2 +2 +3 +3

Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 0.00 0.03 0.06 0.10 0.20 0.50 1.00 ^^^^ SI Concentration(mg/l) 0.0 0.3 0.6 1.0 2.0 5.0 10.0 ^^^^

KET Semiquantitative sign - +- +1 +1 +2 +2 +3 +3 +4 Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) 0 5 10 20 30 45 60 80 ^^^^ SI Concentration(mmol/l) 0.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.5 6.0 8.0 ^^^^

NIT Semiquantitative sign - +1 +2 LEU Conventional Conc.( /ul) - 25 75 250 500 The shaded ranks are indicated with abnormal marks (the PH ranks are not marked with them).

Page 88: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-15

3.1.7. Strip item Select “Strip item” to change the settings for the calibration curves.

3.1.7.1. Calibration curve “Calibration curve” is for changing the calibration curve for each measurement item. A special password is required to make changes to the settings, but it is not described here. This option is not displayed in the normal service mode that is accessible by entering the password “-4030-“.

3.1.7.2. Measurement unit Select “Measurement unit” to change the unit of results for each measurement item. The instructions are described below. 1. Select the measurement item for which to change the unit of results. 2. Type in the character string of the desired unit.

3.1.7.3. Correction coefficient Select “Correction coefficient” to set the primary reflective correction coefficients (A and B) for each measurement item. Measurement results are corrected according to the formula “y = Ax + B”. The setting instructions are described below. 1. Select the measurement item for which to change the primary reflective correction coefficients. 2. Type in the primary reflective correction coefficients.

INIT CAL A

Sets the primary reflective correction coefficient “A”. The range is as follows. 0.900 to 1.100 [Default: 1.000]

INIT CAL B Sets the primary reflective correction coefficient “B”. The range is as follows. -9.9 to 9.9 [Default: 0.0]

[TIP] For “P/C”, one-hundredths of the set coefficient is used in the calculation.

e.g.) When the entry is “5.6”, the result for P/C is calculated using the coefficient “0.056”.

3.1.7.4. Exception judgment Select “Exception judgment” to change the exceptional judgment value for each measurement item. This value determines the result of the measurement item under an exceptional condition. For example, the P/C results can be exceptionally judged under the condition, “the result is DILUTE if the PRO reflectivity is larger than 68% and the CRE reflectivity is smaller than 23%”. These two values can be set here. The instructions are described below. However, no changes can be made to this parameter now because we have not defined how this parameter should be used and reserve it for future use.

1. Select the measurement item for which to change the exceptional judgment value. 2. Type in the exceptional judgment value.

PAR-A Sets the exceptional judgment value “A”. The range is as follows. 0.0 to 99.9 [Default: 1.000]

PAR-B Sets the exceptional judgment value “B”. The range is as follows. 0.0 to 99.9 [Default:1.000]

PAR-C Sets the exceptional judgment value “C”. The range is as follows. 0.0 to 99.9 [Default: 1.000]

3.1.7.5. Item name Select “Item name” to rename the measurement items. The instructions are described below. 1. Select a measurement item to rename. 2. Type in the character string of the new name.

Page 89: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-16

3.1.8. Control ID Select “Control ID” to make the settings related to control IDs. [TIP] To have the control IDs successfully identified, the controls must be set in the normal racks or the item

racks with no specific test strips specified. Use of other racks ignores the control IDs, therefore the controls are measured as normal measurement samples.

USE

Specify whether to identify the controls by barcode IDs. OFF: Does not identify the controls by barcode IDs. [Default] ON: Identifies the controls by barcode IDs.

Start digit Specify from which digit of the read barcode ID the instrument should verify. How the reading is done depends on the settings made for the barcode reader. The range is as follows. 1 to 32 [Default: 1]

Read digit Specify how many digits of the read barcode ID the instrument should verify. How the reading is done depends on the settings made for the barcode reader. The range is as follows. 1 to 18 [Default: 13]

Low Set the ID for the low-density control. The ID must be 18 characters long and can contain any characters.

Middle Set the ID for the middle-density control. The ID must be 18 characters long and can contain any kinds of characters.

High Set the ID for the high-density control. The ID must be 18 characters long and can contain any characters.

3.2. Results The “Results” menu provides options for reviewing or deleting the results obtained in the past.

3.2.1. Print Select “Print” to reprint results. For more information, see the operating manual.

3.2.2. Transmit Select “Transmit” to retransmit results to the external device. For more information, see the operating manual.

3.2.3. View Select “View” to review results on the display. For more information, see the operating manual.

3.2.4. Delete Select “Delete” to delete results from the memory. For more information, see the operating manual.

3.2.5. Online test Select “Online test” to output test data.

Page 90: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-17

3.3. Initial setting The “Initial setting” menu provides options for making the initial settings of the instrument.

3.3.1. System clock setup Select “System clock setup” to set the date and time. For more information, see the operating manual.

3.3.2. Printer setup Select “Printer setup” to make the printer settings.

Use / Not Use

See the operating manual. Copy quantity

Set the number of copies of results to print. The range is as follows. 1 to 3 [Default: 1]

Line feed Set the number of line feeds to add to the end of printed information. The range is as follows. 0 to 9 [Default: 5]

Data line feed Set the number of line feeds to add to the end of a printed result. The range is as follows. 0 to 9 [Default: 0]

Date type Select the date format. The selectable options are listed below. The default setting depends on the shipment destination. YMD: Year, month, day DMY: Day, month, year MDY: Month, day, year

Print Normal data Specify whether to print the normal measurement results. The selectable options are listed below. ON: Prints the normal measurement results. [Default] OFF: Does not print the normal measurement results.

Print control data Specify whether to print the control measurement results. The selectable options are listed below. ON: Prints the control measurement results. [Default] OFF: Does not print the control measurement results. Specify the range of measurement by date and time.

Print stat data Specify whether to print the STAT measurement results. The selectable options are listed below. ON: Prints the STAT measurement results. [Default] OFF: Does not print the STAT measurement results.

Print Item rack No. Specify whether to print the ID numbers of the items racks. The selectable options are listed below. ON: Prints the ID numbers of the item racks. OFF: Does not print the ID numbers of the item racks. [Default] TIP: With IRIS-spec products, this setting default is “ON”.

Page 91: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-18

3.3.3. External output setup Select “External output setup” to make the external output settings.

Use / Not Use

See the operating manual. Format

Select the communication format for outputting results. The selectable options are listed below. AX-4030: AX-4030 format [Default] AX-4280: AX-4280 compatible format. SA-4250: AX-4250 compatible format SA-4230: AX-4230 compatible format SA-4220 8A: AX-4220(8A) compatible format SA-4220 8B: AX-4220(8B) compatible format

Speed Select the baud rate. The selectable options are listed below. 9600: 9600 bps [Default] 19200: 19200 bps 300: 300 bps 600: 600 bps 1200: 1200 bps 2400: 2400 bps 4800: 4800 bps

Way Select simplex or two-way communication. The selectable options are listed below. Simplex: Simplex communication [Default] Two-way: Two-way communication

Expansion port Select the communication format used for outputting measurement results from the expansion port. The selectable options are listed below. NONE: Does not use the expansion port. [Default] AX-4030: Outputs in AX-4030 format. AX-4280: Outputs in an AX-4280 compatible format. SA-4250: Outputs in an AX-4250 compatible format. SA-4230: Outputs in an AX-4230 compatible format. SA-4220 8A: Outputs in an AX-4220(8A) compatible format. SA-4220 8B: Outputs in an AX-4220(8B) compatible format.

Normal data Select whether to transmit normal measurement results to an external device. The selectable options are listed below. ON: Transmits the normal measurement results to an external device. [Default] OFF: Does not transmit the normal measurement results to an external device.

Control data Select whether to transmit control measurement results to an external device. The selectable options are listed below. ON: Transmits the control measurement results to an external device. [Default] OFF: Does not transmit the control measurement results to an external device.

Stat data Select whether to transmit STAT measurement results to an external device. The selectable options are listed below. ON: Transmits the STAT measurement results to an external device. [Default] OFF: Does not transmit the STAT measurement results to an external device.

Normal online Select whether to make inquiries to the host computer about the normal measurement sample IDs during two-way communication. This setting is ineffective with simplex communication. The selectable options are listed below. ON: Makes inquires. [Default] OFF: Does not inquire.

Page 92: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-19

Stat online

Select whether to make inquiries to external devices about the STAT measurement sample IDs during two-way communication. This setting is ineffective with simplex communication. The selectable options are listed below. OFF: Does not inquire. [Default] ON: Make inquires.

Data time out Set the interval, in units of 0.1 second, between blocks of measurement data to be sent to external devices. The range is as follows. 0 to 999 [Default: 20]

Online time out 1 Set the length of time, in units of 0.1 second, to wait for a response from external devices in two-way communication. The range is as follows. 0 to 999 [Default: 40]

Online time out 2 Set the length of time, in units of 0.1 second, to wait for a block of text from an external device in two-way communication. The range is as follows. 0 to 999 [Default: 200]

ID response Set the time of length, in units of 0.1 second, to wait for a response from the host computer after making an ID inquiry to it. The range is as follows. 0 to 9999 [Default: 1800]

Time out ENQ send Set the time of length, in units of 0.1 second, to wait for a response after sending ENQ. The range is as follows. 0 to 9999 [Default: 150]

Time out frame send Set the time of length, in units of 0.1 second, to wait for a response after sending a frame. The range is as follows. 0 to 9999 [Default: 150]

Time out EOT receive Set the time of length, in units of 0.1 second, to wait for the next frame or EOT after sending a response. The range is as follows. 0 to 9999 [Default: 300]

Wait time ENQ –NAK Set the time of length, in units of 0.1 second, to wait after receiving NAK in response to ENQ that the instrument has sent. The range is as follows. 0 to 9999 [Default: 100]

Wait time ENQ –ENQ Set the time of length, in units of 0.1 second, to wait after receiving ENQ in response to ENQ that the instrument has sent. The range is as follows. 0 to 9999 [Default: 10]

3.3.4. Beeper volume setting Select “Beeper volume setting” to change the beeper volume. For more information, see the operating manual.

Page 93: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-20

3.3.5. Barcode Select “Barcode” to make the settings related to the barcode reader.

Use

Select whether to use the barcode reader. The selectable options are listed below. The default setting depends on the shipment destination. OFF: Does not use the barcode reader. ON: Uses the barcode reader.

Start digit Specify the digit from which the barcode reader should start reading. The range is as follows. 1 to 32 [Default: 1]

Read digit Specify the number of digits that the barcode should read. The range is as follows. 1 to 18 [Default: 13]

Miss read Select how the instrument should act when barcode reading fails. The selectable options are listed below. Pass: Skips the sample. [Default] Measure: Measures the sample.

3.3.6. Sampler Select “Sampler” to specify how the sampler should operate with the sample racks. The selectable options are listed below.

Rack feed

One-way: Sends the sample rack from the loading side to the unloading side of the sampler. [Default] Loop: Sends the sample rack from the loading side to the unloading side of the sampler, and then

sends the rack back to the loading side. Upper: Operates as if another device is bridge-connected to the upper side of the sampler. Lower: Operates as if another device is bridge-connected to the lower side of the sampler. Up & low: Operates as if other devices are bridge-connected to the upper and lower sides of the sampler.

3.3.7. Rack ID Select “Rack ID” to set the rack types to the sample racks numbered ID 1 to 30. The selectable rack types are listed below.

Item: Item rack Start: Start rack. STAT/CTRL: STAT and control rack Pass: Pass rack None: Normal rack

3.3.8. Serial No. Select “Serial No.” to set the serial number of the instrument. This number must be 8 characters long and can contain any characters.

Page 94: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-21

3.3.9. Option Select “Option” to make the settings for the options that the instrument is equipped with.

Language

Select which language to use for information on the display and printed reports. The selectable options depend on the shipment destination.

Ethernet Select whether to use an Ethernet connection. The selectable options are listed below. OFF: Does not use an Ethernet connection. [Default] ON: Uses an Ethernet connection.

[NOTE] Observe the instructions below when changing the “Ethernet” setting. 1. The Ethernet option is factory-set to “OFF”. Therefore, the instrument must be turned on without

connecting the LAN cable. 2. Set “Ethernet” to “ON”. 3. Turn off the instrument and connect the LAN cable to it. 4. Turn on the instrument.

DHCP Select whether to use DHCP. The selectable options are listed below. OFF: Does not use DHCP. [Default] ON: Uses DHCP.

IP Address Specify the IP address used when DHCP is off. The ranges are listed below. 0 to 255 [Default: 255] 0 to 255 [Default: 255] 0 to 255 [Default: 255] 0 to 255 [Default: 255]

Sub net mask Specify the subnet mask used when DHCP is off. The ranges are listed below. 0 to 255 [Default: 255] 0 to 255 [Default: 255] 0 to 255 [Default: 255] 0 to 255 [Default: 255] [NOTE] Subnet mask“255.255.255.255”is regarded as “invalid” by the Ethernet microcomputer.

e.g.) 255. 255. 255. 255: Invalid (the Ethernet connection is disabled). 255. 255. 255. 0: Valid (the Ethernet connection is enabled).

Default gate way Specify the IP address of the default gateway used when DHCP is off. The ranges are listed below. 0 to 255 [Default: 255] 0 to 255 [Default: 255] 0 to 255 [Default: 255] 0 to 255 [Default: 255] [NOTE] Default gateway “255.255.255.255”is regarded as “invalid” by the Ethernet microcomputer.

e.g.) 255. 255. 255. 255: Invalid (the Ethernet connection is disabled). 255. 255. 255. 0: Valid (the Ethernet connection is enabled).

Ethernet ID Specify the Ethernet ID for each instrument. The range is as follows. 0 to 255 [Default: 0]

Remote maintenance

Select whether to use remote maintenance. The selectable options are listed below. OFF: Does not use remote maintenance. [Default] ON: Uses remote maintenance.

Page 95: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-22

Round-bottom Spitz

Select whether to use round-bottom sample tubes. The selectable options are listed below. OFF: Does not use the round-bottom sample tubes. [Default] ON: Uses the round-bottom sample tubes.

[TIP] When “Round-bottom Spitz” is set to “OFF”, the nozzle does not aspirate samples from normal

tubes if the sample volume is too small of a quantity to measure. But, when this parameter is turned “ON”, the nozzle descends further making it possible to draw even insufficient samples from normal tubes. In this case, it is impossible to manually measure these samples later because they are automatically discarded. For this reason, care must be taken when using both normal and round-bottom tubes at the same time when this parameter is turned “ON”.

3.4. Print The “Print” menu provides the options for printing information about the instrument.

3.4.1. Trouble list Select “Trouble list” to print a list of errors and trouble history records. For more information, see the operating manual.

3.4.2. Abnormal results list Select “Abnormal results list” to print an abnormal results list. For more information, see the operating manual.

3.4.3. Parameter settings Select “Parameter settings” to print a list of the current parameter settings. 3.4.3.1. Initial settings For more information, see the operating manual.

3.4.3.2. Chemical system For more information, see the operating manual.

3.4.3.3. Calibration Select “Calibration” to print calibration information.

3.4.3.4. Detail setting Select “Detail setting” to print a list of detailed settings.

3.4.3.5. Strip INFO Select “Strip INFO” to print information about the test strips.

3.4.3.6. Strip item INFO Select “Strip item INFO” to print information about the measurement items.

3.4.3.7. Color INFO Select “Color INFO” to print information about the color tone.

3.4.3.8. Machine INFO Select “Machine INFO” to print information about the mechanical systems.

3.4.3.9. All settings Select “All settings” to print a list of all parameter settings.

Page 96: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-23

3.5. Maintenance The “Maintenance” menu provides options for performing maintenance tasks on the instrument.

3.5.1. S.G. cell washout Select “S.G. cell washout” to wash the S. G. cell. For more information, see the operating manual.

3.5.2. Clean washing bath and tray

Select “Clean washing bath and tray” to clean the washing bath and transport tray. For more information, see the operating manual.

3.5.3. Check measurement Select “Check measurement” to perform check measurement. For more information, see the operating manual.

3.5.4. Maintenance information Select “Maintenance information” to view information on maintenance tasks. For more information, see the operating manual.

3.6. Refresh the setting The “Refresh the setting” menu provides options for initializing the parameters and setting up the instrument for the shipment destination.

3.6.1. All settings Select “All settings” to initialize all of the parameter settings. Once this task has been performed, measurement cannot be carried out until the calibration curve information is written in memory by completing the shipment destination settings (see “Factory setup” described below).

3.6.2. Factory setup Select “Factory setup” to set up the instrument according to the shipment destination. This setting determines the destination-specific specifications including the supported test strips and the units used with measurement results. Measurement cannot be performed until this setting is correctly completed. Specific

Type in the password for the shipment destination. If the password is valid, information specific to that destination is written in the memory.

3.6.3. Parameter settings Select “Parameter settings” to initialize the measurement condition settings (Parameter setting).

3.6.4. Initial settings Select “Initial settings” to initialize the initial settings (Initial setting). 3.6.5. Chemical system Select “Chemical system” to initialize the settings or other information that can be changed in the service mode.

3.6.5.1. Calibration Select “Calibration” to initialize calibration information.

3.6.5.2. Detail settings Select “Detail settings” to initialize detailed settings (Detail setting).

3.6.5.3. Strip INFO Select “Strip INFO” to initialize information about the test strips.

3.6.5.4. Strip item INFO Select “Strip item INFO” to initialize information about the measurement items.

3.6.5.5. Machine INFO Select “Machine INFO” to initialize information about the mechanical systems.

Page 97: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3.7. System

3.7.1. Total counter Select “Total counter” to view the total measurement counter and the action counters of the pumps.

Measure count

The total measurement count is displayed.

Washing pump count The pumping action count of the washing pump is displayed.

Sampling pump count The pumping action count of the sampling pump is displayed.

3.7.2. Calibration Select “Calibration” to perform calibrations.

3.7.2.1. Turb calibration Select “Turb calibration” to perform a turbidity calibration.

Standard

Type in the density of the standard solution used for the turbidity calibration. The range is as follows. 0.000 to 1.999 [Default: 1.000]

3.7.2.2. Hb calibration Select “Hb calibration” to perform an Hb calibration.

Standard

Type in the density of the standard solution used for the Hb calibration. The range is as follows. 0 to 99 [Default: 25]

3.7.3. Packing mode Select “Packing mode” to prepare the instrument for packaging (e.g. moving the nozzle and transport section to the designated positions).

3.7.4. Adjustment Select “Adjustment” to adjust the individual sections of the instrument.

3.7.4.1. Aging mode Select “Aging mode” to age the individual mechanical systems. The aging instructions are described below.

1. Select the aging action to be performed.

In the following example, the test strips are ejected from feeder 1.

3-24

Aging (7110) 2005-04-25 13:58 Aging item [Strip carry 1 ] OK BACK

Page 98: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

2. The aging action is repeated until STOP is pressed. Pressing BACK returns the display back to the

screen in step 1. Information on each aging action is also displayed.

The options selectable in step 1 are listed below.

Aging item Select the aging action to be performed. The selectable options are listed below. Strip carry 1: Performs measurement actions other than sampler operation. [NOTE] Select the feeder to perform this operation. Strip carry 2: Ejects test strips from the feeder and transports them to the waste box. [NOTE] Select the feeder to perform this operation. Nozzle(Rack): Performs sample aspiration actions at the rack position. Nozzle(STAT): Performs sample aspiration actions at the STAT position. Sampler: Allows the sampler to perform measurement actions and displays information on the

aspiration position. Sampler(Tube on): Allows the sampler to perform measurement actions and stops it if no sample tube is

detected. Sampler(Tube off): Allows the sampler to perform measurement actions and stops it if one or more sample

tubes are detected.

3.7.4.2. Hard test Select “Hard test” to test the individual hardware units. The test instructions are described below.

Feeder Introduction Nozzle Handling Sampler

1. Select the unit number to be tested.

Hard test

(7420) 2005-04-25 13:58 1 Feeder 2 Introduction 3 Nozzle 4 Handling 5 Sampler OK BACK

3-25

Page 99: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

2. Select the type of hardware test to be performed.

In this example, the feeder unit test has been selected and, on the screen shown below, the status of the sensors related to the feeder is displayed.

[TIP] The type and number of sensors that appear on the screen depends on the selected test.

3-26

3. To start the hardware test, press ACTION . Then, an action selection window like shown below will appear.

Select the action to be performed and press OK .

Hard test (7421) 2005-04-25 13:58 Drum INIT : ON Drum side L : OFF Drum side R : OFF Reverse INIT : OFF Drum strip 1 : Non 2 : Non Cover 1 : Close 2 : Close ACTION BACK

Hard test (7421) 2005-04-25 13:58 Drum INIT : ON Drum side L : OFF Drum side R : OFF Reverse INIT : OFF Drum strip 1 : Non 2 : Non Cover 1 : Close 2 : Close ACTION BACK

Feeder action [Drum INIT ]

4. To repeat the same action, press ACTION . To test a different unit, press BACK .

Page 100: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-27

The options selectable in step 3 are listed below.

Feeder: Feeder unit Drum INIT: Initial position Drum set 1: [Feeder 1] Test strip drum set position Drum in 1: [Feeder 1] Test strip drum introduction position Reverse in 1: [Feeder 1] Reverse drum introduction position Drum out 1: [Feeder 1] Test strip drum ejection position Reverse out 1: [Feeder 1] Reverse drum ejection position Reverse rtn 1: [Feeder 1] Reverse drum return Drum rtn 1: [Feeder 1] Test strip drum return Drum set 2: [Feeder 2] Test strip drum set position Drum in 2: [Feeder 2] Test strip drum introduction position Reverse in 2: [Feeder 2] Reverse drum introduction position Drum out 2: [Feeder 2] Test strip drum ejection position Reverse out 2: [Feeder 2] Reverse drum ejection position Reverse rtn 2: [Feeder 2] Reverse drum return Drum rtn 2: [Feeder 2] Test strip drum return

Introduction: Test strip introduction unit

INTRO INIT: Initial position INTRO feeder: Test strip receipt position INTRO pad: Pad detection position INTRO drop: Sample staining position Pad scan: Pad detection action

Nozzle: Nozzle unit

Initialize: Initial position Wash UD: Up-and-down movement at the washing bath Rack FB: Back-and-forth movement at sample rack position Rack UD: Up-and-down movement at sample rack position STAT FB: Back-and-forth movement at STAT position STAT UD: Up-and-down movement at STAT position Drop FB: Back-and-forth movement at sample staining position Drop UD S: Up-and-down movement at sample staining start position Drop UD E: Up-and-down movement at sample staining end position

Handling: Test strip transport unit

Initialize: Initial position Strip feed: Test strip feeding action

Sampler: Sampler

Initialize: Initialization MEAS 1st: Action for moving the lever to the position where rack feed starts from MEAS port: Port forwarding action Carry send: Return-side lever action

Page 101: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3.7.4.3. Pulse adjustment Select “Pulse adjustment” to adjust the pulses of the following systems. The instructions are described below.

Introduction Nozzle Optical System Sampler

1. Select the unit to adjust the pulses for by pressing a numeric key.

3-28

2. Select the action to adjust the pulses for.

In the following example, the nozzle position at the washing bath will be adjusted.

Nozzle (7432) 2005-04-25 13:58 Adjustment item [Wash FB]

OK BACK

Pulse adjust (7430) 2005-04-25 13:58 1 Introduction 2 Nozzle 3 Optical system 4 Sampler OK BACK

Page 102: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3. After sequential operation has been completed, the unit stops at the position to be adjusted.

Note that what appears on the screen differs between the nozzle back-and-forth adjustment and others.

Nozzle back-and-forth adjustment Other adjustments

3-29

4. The numeric keys available for pulse adjustment are listed below (they are also listed below “Operation” on the screen). Pressing one of these keys moves the selected system. Adjust the pulses while viewing system movement. Note that pulse adjustments are made relative to the default values.

[4] key: -1 pulse movement [7] key: +1 pulse movement [6] key: -10 pulse movement [9] key: +10 pulse movement [5] key: -10 pulse movement for the nozzle up-and-down system [8] key: +10 pulse movement for the nozzle up-and-down system

5 When the adjustment has been completed, press OK .

The options selectable in step 2 are listed below. Feeder

Initialize: Initial position Introduction

Drop: Sample staining position Judge: Test strip identification position Receive: Test strip receipt position

Nozzle Wash FB: Back-and-forth position at the washing bath Wash UD: Up-and-down position at the washing bath Rack FB: Back-and-forth position at the sample rack Rack UD: Up-and-down position at the sample rack STAT FB: Back-and-forth position at the STAT port STAT UD: Up-and-down position at the STAT port Drop FB: Sample staining back-and-forth position Drop UD S: Sample staining start up-and-down position Drop UD E: Sample staining end up-and-down position

Optical System Marker: Test strip marker detection position

Sampler MEAS 1st: Action for moving the lever to the position where the rack feed starts from Carry send: Return-side lever feed length

Pulse adjust (7432) 2005-04-25 13:58 Wash UD 2561<+ 250> * ************* Operat ion ************** 4 key: -1 7 key: +1 6 key: -10 9 key: +10 * ************************************** OK BACK

Pulse adjust (7432) 2005-04-25 13:58 Wash FB PI:0 2561<+ 250> * ************* Operat ion ************** 4 key: -1 7 key: +1 6 key: -10 9 key: +10 5 key: -10(UD) 8 key: +10(UD)

Relative pulses Total

pulses

*************************************** OK BACK

Page 103: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-30

3.7.4.4. A/D volume adjustment Select “A/D volume adjustment” to adjust the electronic volumes for the individual sections. Actions necessary for this adjustment are performed. The selectable options are listed below.

Strip detect(Feeder 1): Feeder 1 test strip front and back sensor Strip detect(Feeder 2): Feeder 2 test strip front and back sensor Pad detect: Pad detector Hand speed: Velocity control of the test strip transport unit Reflection system: Optical unit Flow system: S.G/turbidity/Hb meters

3.7.4.5. Pulse edit Select “Pulse edit” to specify the pulse counts by numeric values for the hardware sections listed in “3.7.4.3. Pulse adjustment”.

3.7.5. Feeder torque adjust Select “Feeder torque adjust” to adjust the torque of the feeder drum. Each time this parameter is selected, the drum rotates one full turn.

3.7.6. Detail setting Select “Detail setting” to make detailed settings for the instrument.

3.7.6.1. S.G. Select “S.G.” to make the detailed settings for S.G.

S.G request

Turn on or off the S.G. calibration request that is made when the power is turned on. Setting “0” disables the S.G. calibration request. This allows the instrument to always put itself on measurement-standby after being powered on. Setting a value other than “0” enables the S. G. calibration request. If the specified number of days has passed since the last S.G. calibration, the instrument puts itself on S.G.-calibration standby after being powered on. In this case, the instrument cannot be on measurement-standby until S.G. calibration is completed correctly (however, it is possible to access the sub-menus from the S.G. calibration-standby status). The range is as follows. 0 to 9 days [Default: 0 day] TIP: If a value other than “0” is set, the S.G. calibration low solution is fixed to “1.005”, and the S.G. calibration high solution is fixed to “1.035”.

S.G. correct

Select whether to correct the S.G. values based on PRO/GLU. The selectable options are listed below. ON: Corrects the S.G. values. [Default] OFF: Does not correct them.

S.G. abnormal low

Specify the lower limit of normal S.G. values. The range is as follows. 0.000 to 1.999 [Default: 0.995]

S.G. abnormal high

Specify the upper limit of normal S.G. values. The range is as follows. 0.000 to 1.999 [Default: 1.055]

Page 104: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-31

3.7.6.2. Turb and Hb Select “Turb and Hb” to make the settings for the turbidity and Hb measurements.

Turb level(-1)

Specify the threshold between “clear” and “turbid” for the turbidity measurement. The range is as follows. 0.000 to 0.999 [Default: 0.012]

Turb level(+1)

Specify the threshold between “turbid” and “dense turbid” for the turbidity measurement. The range is as follows. 0.000 to 0.999 [Default: 0.100]

Turb CAL standard

Specify the initial value of the turbidity calibration solution. The range is as follows. 0.000 to 1.999 [Default: 1.000]

Turb CAL scatter

Specify the scattering intensity of the turbidity calibration solution. The range is as follows. 0.000 to 1.000 [Default: 0.000]

Hb level

Specify the threshold to determine whether to carry out additional washout based on the Hb level. 0 to 99 [Default: 25]

Hb CAL standard

Specify the initial value of the Hb calibration solution. 0 to 99 [Default: 25]

Hb CAL TRANS

Specify the initial value of the transmittance of the Hb calibration solution. 0.000 to 0.999 [Default: 0.000]

3.7.6.3. Strip

Temp correct

Select whether to correct the temperature. The selectable options are listed below. ON: Enables the temperature correction. [Default] OFF: Disables the correction.

Over reflex

Specify the reflectivity, in percentage, used to judge abnormal reflectivity of the measurement items on the test strips. The range is as follows. 0 to 200 [Default: 120]

Abnormal color

Select whether to detect abnormal coloring. The selectable options are listed below. ON: Enables abnormal coloring detection. [Default] OFF: Disables abnormal coloring detection.

3.7.6.4. Result Select “Result” to make the settings for the printed result reports.

3.7.6.5. Print temp Select whether to include the temperature information in the printed result report. The selectable options are listed below.

ON: Includes the temperature information. [Default] OFF: Does not include temperature information.

Page 105: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-32

3.7.6.6. Print and wash mark Select whether to add the additional washout marks to the printed result reports. The selectable options are listed below.

ON: Adds the additional washout markers. [Default] OFF: Does not add the additional washout markers.

3.7.6.7. Rank mark Select the output format of the rank sign. The selectable options are listed below.

4+: “1+,2+…”. [Default] +4: “+1,+2…”. ++++: “+,++…”. ????: ?

3.7.6.8. Abnormal mark Select the type of the abnormal value mark. The selectable options are listed below.

All: Adds the abnormal value marks to the measurement items and samples. [Default] Item: Adds the abnormal value marks to the measurement items only. OFF: Does not add the abnormal value marks to anything.

3.7.6.9. S.G. limit mark Select whether to add the abnormal mark to the printed result report when the S.G. value correction based on PRO/GLU cannot be performed. The selectable options are listed below.

OFF: Adds the abnormal mark to the printed result report. [Default] ON: Does not add the abnormal mark to the printed result report.

3.7.6.10. Drop miss Select whether to check for abnormal sample staining. The selectable options are listed below.

Data: Checks for abnormal sample staining. [Default] No data: Does not run the check.

3.7.6.11. Data type Select how the measurement results obtained with the test strips should be output. The selectable options are listed below.

Normal: Outputs the results in the format determined by the “data output format (density or reflectivity)” parameter. [Default]

A/D: Outputs the results as raw A/D data.

3.7.6.12. Check result Select the type of the normal check measurement results that appear on the printed result reports. The selectable options are listed below.

Normal: Prints the result as reflectivity. [Default] Detail: Prints the result as reflectivity, and also adds the reflectivities of each pad and wavelength.

3.7.6.13. S.G. ABN mark Select when to add the abnormal S.G. mark to the printed result report. The selectable options are listed below.

Abnormal & Limit: Adds the S.G. abnormal mark when abnormal S. G. values are obtained or a correction limit error occurs. [Default]

All: Adds the S.G. abnormal mark anytime an abnormal S.G. condition generates.

3.7.6.14. TURB ABN mark Specify where to add the abnormal turbidity marks. The selectable options are listed below.

0: Does not use the abnormal turbidity marks. [Default] 1: Adds the abnormal turbidity marks to results of “1+” or higher. 2: Adds the abnormal turbidity marks to results of “2+” or higher. 3: Adds the abnormal turbidity marks to skipped calibrations and measurements. 4: Adds the abnormal turbidity marks to results of “1+” or higher and to skipped calibrations and

measurements. 5: Adds the abnormal turbidity marks to results of “2+” or higher and to skipped calibrations and

measurements.

Page 106: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-33

3.7.6.15. A/D aux mode Select the format of the data sent from the A/D sub-CPU. Do not use this parameter because it is reserved for product development purposes only.

3.7.6.16. Print turb coef info Select whether to include the information on scattering light correction coefficients in the printed result reports. The selectable options are listed below.

ON: Includes the information on the scattering light correction coefficients. OFF: Does not include the information on the scattering light correction coefficients. [Default]

3.7.6.17. Simulation Select “Simulation” to specify whether to check the individual systems that can possibly generate errors or trouble. This function is mainly used to debug the program.

Strip check

Select whether to check the test strips. The selectable options are listed below. ON: Checks the test strip. [Default] OFF: Does not run the check. [TIP] When this parameter is set to “ON”, the test strip check is completed successfully if one or more test

strips are detected during measurement, whereas trouble arises if no test strip is detected. Washing SOL check

Select whether to run the washing solution check. The selectable options are listed below. ON: Checks the solution level. OFF: Does not run the check. [TIP] When this parameter is set to “ON”, an error arises when the washing solution check detects that

there is no washing solution in the bottle. Sampler simulation

Select whether to allow the instrument to act as if it the sampler is attached even if it is not. The selectable options are listed below. OFF: Disables sampler simulation. [Default] ON: Enables sampler simulation.

Sampling TRBL check Select whether to simulate sampling trouble. The selectable options are listed below. ON: Generates sampling trouble. [Default] OFF: Does not generate sampling trouble.

Add wash check Select whether to check the additional washout. The selectable options are listed below. ON: Checks the additional washout. [Default] OFF: Does not run the check.

S.G. unit Select whether to use the S.G. meter. The selectable options are listed below. ON: Uses the S.G. meter. [Default] OFF: Does not use it.

Tb,Hb trbl check Select whether to check the turbidity and Hb meters for abnormal conditions. The selectable options are listed below. ON: Checks the turbidity and Hb meters. [Default] OFF: Does not run the check. [TIP] When this parameter is set to “ON”, the instrument simulates the abnormal turbidity/Hb meter

trouble. Strip type check

Select whether to identify the type of the test strips. The selectable options are listed below. ON: Checks the type of the test strips. [Default] OFF: Does not run the check. [TIP] When this parameter is set to “ON”, “STRIP MISS” is added to the result report if an abnormal

condition is detected.

Page 107: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode AX-4030 Service Manual

3-34

Drop miss Check

Select whether to detect failed sample staining. The selectable options are listed below. ON: Detects failed sample staining. [Default] OFF: Does not run the detection.

Slant TRBL Check

Select whether to check if the test strip is horizontally out of position in the optical unit. The selectable options are: ON: Checks the test strip position. OFF: Does not run the check. [TIP] When this parameter is set to “ON”, the instrument simulates trouble.

Page 108: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AX-4030 Service Manual

Chapter 4 Circuit Diagrams

1. Circuit Diagrams Analyzer Sampler

4-1

Page 109: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 110: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 111: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 112: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 113: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 114: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 115: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 116: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 117: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 118: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 119: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 120: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 121: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 122: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 123: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 124: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 125: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 126: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 127: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 128: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 129: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 130: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 131: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 132: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 133: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 134: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 135: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 136: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 137: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 138: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 139: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 140: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 141: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 142: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 143: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 144: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 145: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 146: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 147: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 148: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 149: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 150: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 151: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 152: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 153: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 154: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 155: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 156: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030
Page 157: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AX-4030 Service Manual

5-1

Chapter 5 Standard Inspection

№ Type of Inspection Ref. No. Test Items

1 Power On Status Check

2 Key Input Check

3 Display Quality Check

4 Solution/Paper Empty Detection Check

5 Fan Rotation Check (3 Fans)

6 Memory Clear Check

7 Printer Print Quality Check

8 Waste Box Full Detection and Waste Box Tray Position Detection Check

9 Air Pump Suction Check

10 Sample Tube Sensor Malfunction Check (Normal Measurement)

11 Minimum Sample Level Check

13 Pulser Pump Operation Check

14 Pinch Valves Operation Check

15 3-Way Valves Operation Check

16 External Output Check

17 STAT Measurement Check

18 Barcode Reading Check

19 Overflow Detection Check

1 Function Checks

20 Continuous Measurement Test (Data Check)

21 Test Strip Ejection Check

22 Test Strip Identification Check

23 AUTION CHECK Measurement Check (Control Urine)

24 Optical Unit Reproducibility Check

25 Color Paper Measurement Check

26 Old Solution Contamination Check

27 Hb Detection Check

28 Specific Gravity Meter Linearity Check

29 Specific Gravity Meter Reproducibility Check

2 Performance Checks

30 Turbidity Meter Check

Page 158: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 5 Standard Inspection AX-4030 Service Manual

5-2

1 Inspection Content and Passing Criteria

1) Power On Status Check Check instrument operation and display content at power on.

<Passing Criteria> Display and operation must be as follows. Power on screen The ARKRAY logo must appear for about 25 sec. During this time, the instrument checks the subCPU version and the data in the RAM.

The product name and version must appear for 2 sec. During this time, the instrument checks the data in the flash ROM.

The initialization screen must appear and the I2C and hardware must initialize.

AX-4030 V1.00

Startup Initializing… Please wait ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■

Page 159: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 5 Standard Inspection AX-4030 Service Manual

5-3

After hardware initialization is complete, the standby screen must appear.

Ready for measurement

2004-06-03 10:00

Measurement start No. 0001

Test strips in feeder 1 1:10EA

Test strips in feeder 2 2:9UB

Menu Meas No. Strip S.G. Cal

2) Key Input Check Operate the keys as below and check the display content and electronic sounds.

On the standby screen: (1) START → STOP (2) F1 → F4 (3) F2 → F4 (4) F3 → F4 (5) STAT → F4 (6) STAT → F3 → ENTER → ENTER → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9 → - → F4

(7) FEED <Passing Criteria> ・With the key sequences of (1) to (6), an electronic tone must be

heard and the input must appear in the specified location of the display when the keys are pressed.

・With (7), the thermal printer paper must be fed.

・ The instrument must automatically switch from feeder 1 to feeder 2. ・ The test strip type sensor must not read the test strip wrongly. ・ Sample tubes must be detected without fail. ・ Fluid level must not be wrongly detected. ・ Staining must not be performed incorrectly. ・

3) Display Quality Check Check the displayed quality of content appearing on the display. Also, check the operation of the contrast controller at the bottom of the

Page 160: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 5 Standard Inspection AX-403 ervice Manual

5-4

0 S

operator panel. <Passing Criteria> Check the below passing criteria are satisfied.

・ The LCD must not be tilted to a degree that instrument appearance is damaged.

・ All displayed content must be clear and integral with no missing dots.

・ It must be possible to adjust LCD contrast.

4) Solution/Paper Empty Detection Check (1) Set the liquid sensor of the washing solution bottle in the solution

empty state and check instrument status. (Perform the check with the power on.)

(2) Remove all thermal printer paper and check instrument status. (Perform the check during measurement.)

<Passing Criteria> (1) W003 must trigger. (2) W009 must trigger. (The warning must clear when paper is loaded.)

・ 5) Fan Rotation Check (3 Fans)

Hold a thin piece of paper near to the fan and check fan operation. <Passing Criteria> The upper 2 fans must blow air. The lower fan must suction air.

6) Memory Clear Check Reprint the data in memory after measuring 10 or more samples and check that the data was stored in memory. Then, clear the memory and try printing the data again.

<Passing Criteria> The data must be cleared from memory and nothing must be printed out.

7) Printer Printing Check Check the print quality of the printer.

<Passing Criteria> Characters must be of a consistent density without blurring or omissions.

8) Waste Box Full Detection and Waste Box Tray Position Detection Check A) Turn on the power with the test strip full detection sensor interrupted.

Page 161: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 5 Standard Inspection AX-4030 Service Manual

5-5

B) Turn on the power with the waste box tray position detection sensor interrupted. Check instrument status in both situations.

<Passing Criteria> W004 must trigger.

9) Air Pump Suction Check Check suction from the washing bath.

<Passing Criteria> Solution must not spill from the nozzle insertion hole of the washing bath. Liquid waste must be vigorously pumped from the washing bath to the trap bottle.

10) Sample Tube Sensor Malfunction Check (Normal Measurement) Load empty racks into the sampler and perform measurement operation in the loop transportation mode.

<Passing Criteria> No sample tube must be detected at each port.

11) Minimum Sample Level Check Absorb 2 mL of red dye (Acid red 52 1.5mg/dL) with a test strip (AUTION Sticks 10EA) using a sample tube (manufactured by Ono Pharmaceutical). (N = 10)

<Passing Criteria> Dye must evenly absorb in all pads of the test strip without leaking. (GLU cell excluded)

A

1

(

I

C

12) Pump Operation Check Check operation of the staining and washing pumps during measurement.

<Passing Criteria> Check the below passing criteria are satisfied.

・ Trouble must not occur. ・ Solution must not leak from the plunger pump. ・ Air must not accumulate inside the pump body. Small quantities of air are acceptable as long as trouble is not caused.

13) Pulser Pump Operation Check Check the suction of liquid waste from the trap bottle.

<Passing Criteria> Liquid waste must be vigorously pumped from the trap bottle to outside the instrument.

cid red 52

.5 mg/dL

Tokyo Chemical

ndustry)

ode: A0600

Page 162: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 5 Standard Inspection AX-4030 Service Manual

5-6

14) Pinch Valves Operation Check The pinch valves work during measurement. Check the following pinch valves.

・ S.G. unit (x 1) ・ Liquid waste flow line unit (x 2)

<Passing Criteria> The pinch valves must be working.

15) 3-Way Valve Operation Check The 3-way valves work during measurement. Check the following 3-way valves.

・ Washing solution pump (x 1) ・ Flow line base (x 2)

<Passing Criteria> The 3-way valves must be working.

16) External Output Check Set up external output and connect the external output check tool to the external output terminal. Then, output the data in memory.

<Passing Criteria> Measurement data in the instrument and check tool must be identical.

[Initial settings]

[External output setup]

[No Use] → [Use]

17) STAT Measurement Check Add 10 mL of tap water to each of the sample tubes. Load the sample tubes into the STAT and control rack, and perform rack STAT measurements on them all. Also, load one sample tube into the STAT port and perform a port STAT measurement from the operator panel. (N = 1)

<Passing Criteria> STAT measurements must end without trouble and the instrument must return to normal measurement.

18) Barcode Reading Check Perform measurements and check the reading status of the built-in barcode reader. Also, connect the hand-held barcode reader to the instrument and check the reading status.

<Passing Criteria> Barcodes labels must be correctly read.

[Service menu]

[Initial settings]

[Set BarCode] to

[ON]

Page 163: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 5 Standard Inspection AX-4030 Service Manual

5-7

19) Overflow Detection Check Check the overflow terminals are working. Check terminals in the below locations.

・ Overflow terminal of washing bath ・ Overflow terminal of S. G. meter base ・ Overflow terminal of trap bottle

<Passing Criteria> Trouble must occur when terminals are continuous.

20) Continuous Measurement Test (Data Check) Ready the instrument for user measurements and continuously measure 200 samples in 5 batches. (6 hr total) Use the “AUTION Sticks 10EA” test strips. Load 100 test strips into each feeder 1 and 2. Load 100 sample tubes containing 10 mL of water into the sampler.

<Passing Criteria> Check the below passing criteria are satisfied.

・ Measurements for 1,000 samples must end without trouble. ・ Test strips must not clog the test strip ejector of the feeders.

4.2 Performance Checks 21) Test Strip Ejection Check

Load 200 test strips (AUTION Sticks 10EA) into each feeder and check ejection. Check the following equation applies via a hardware test in the service mode. Ejection success rate = Number of ejected strips ÷ Number of ejection sequences

<Passing Criteria> Check the below passing criteria are satisfied.

・ Ejection success rate must be 90% or higher. ・ Test strips must not clog the mechanism during ejection

evaluation.

22) Test Strip Identification Check Check test strip identification performance using AUTION Sticks 10PA.

<Passing Criteria> Trouble must not occur.

AUTION CHECK I:

S735-201

AUTION CHECK II:

S735-202

23) AUTION CHECK Measurement Check (Control Urine) Measure AUTION CHECKs I and II using AUTION Sticks 10EA.

Page 164: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 5 Standard Inspection AX-4030 Service Manual

5-8

(N = 2: Reflectance mode) Prepare 2 mL of AUTION CHECK per instrument, and repeat control measurement twice. (Sequence: I → II → I → II)

<Passing Criteria> Results must be within expected values contained in delivery documents. (S.G. excluded)

24)Optical Unit Reproducibility Check

Set the instrument to the reflectivity mode and perform a check measurement.

<Passing Criteria> The S.D value must be 0.5% or less. Load a gray check strip into the feeder upside-down.

25)Color Paper Measurement Check

Set the instrument to the reflectivity mode and perform a check measurement.

<Passing Criteria> Reflectivity of each GLU, PRO, BIL, URO, PH, SG, BLD, KET, NIT and LEU must be within the range of specified values. (See “Product Specification”.) Load the color paper into the feeder upside-down.

26) Old Solution Contamination Check Perform “41) AUTION CHECK Measurement Check” with the additional wash function off and check BLD of the I solution of the second test is negative.

<Passing Criteria> BLD of the I solution of the second test must be negative. (BLD must be as described in package insert.)

27) Hb Detection Check Measure red dye (Acid Red) and check that the additional wash function works. (N = 1) * Turn on the additional wash function.

<Passing Criteria> The additional wash function must work (nozzle must rise 6 time total.).

Page 165: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 5 Standard Inspection AX-4030 Service Manual

5-9

28) S. G. Meter Linearity Check Measure the standard solutions (1.000, 1.010, 1.020, 1.030 and 1.040) for S.G. calibration. (N = 10)

<Passing Criteria> 1.000±0.002 Turn thermal compensation on. 1.010±0.002 Set the instrument to reflectivity mode. 1.020±0.002 1.030±0.002 1.040±0.002 (Digital errors included)

29) S. G. Meter Reproducibility Check Measure the 1.020 standard solution for S.G. calibration N = 10 times.

<Passing Criteria> The C.V. value for the N = 10th measurement must be 2% or less.

30) Turbidity Measurement Check Measure the standard solution for turbidity check. (N = 1): See “TURB” on the printed results report in the reflectivity mode.

<Passing Criteria> Turbidity must be 1.00±0.10.

Page 166: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 5 Standard Inspection AX-4030 Service Manual

5-10

Page 167: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AX-4030 Service Manual

6-1

Chapter 6 Adjustments

Contents

1. Adjustment Items, Tools and Supplies (Main Body) ..........................................................................2 1.1. Adjustment Items, Tools and Supplies...........................................................................................2

2. Adjustments (Main Body)......................................................................................................................3 2.1. Main Body Electrical Adjustments..................................................................................................3

2.1.1. Feeder Sensor Adjustment................................................................................................3 2.1.2. Test Strip Transport Section Speed Adjustment ...............................................................9 2.1.3. Test Strip Identification Section Sensor Adjustment .......................................................10 2.1.4. Reflection Optical Unit LED Luminosity Adjustment .......................................................12 2.1.5. Turbidity/Colorimeter LED Luminosity and Amp Gain Adjustment .................................14 2.1.6. Liquid Sensor Board Adjustment.....................................................................................16 2.1.7. Power Supply Relay Board Adjustment ..........................................................................18

2.2. Calibration for Turbidity and Hb Measurement ............................................................................19 2.2.1. Turbidity Measurement Calibration .................................................................................19 2.2.2. Hb Measurement Calibration...........................................................................................20

2.3. Main Body Pulse Adjustment .......................................................................................................21 2.3.1. Test Strip Introduction Section Pulse Adjustments .........................................................21 2.3.2. Nozzle Drive Nozzle Adjustments ...................................................................................24 2.3.3. Feeder Pulse Adjustment ................................................................................................33

2.4. Unit Positioning ............................................................................................................................34 2.4.1. Test Strip Reaction Section Positioning ..........................................................................34 2.4.2. Test Strip Introduction Section Positioning .....................................................................35 2.4.3. Nozzle Drive Positioning .................................................................................................36 2.4.4. Test Strip Identification Section Positioning ....................................................................37 2.4.5. Pump Positioning.............................................................................................................38 2.4.6. Reflection System Sensors Positioning...........................................................................39 2.4.7. Introduction Arm Positioning ...........................................................................................41 2.4.8. Washing Bath Positioning ...............................................................................................42 2.4.9. Sample Tube Sensor Positioning ....................................................................................43 2.4.10. Outer Cover Open-Closed Detectors Positioning .........................................................45

2.5. Belt Tension Adjustment ..............................................................................................................49 2.5.1. Feeder Belt Tension Adjustment .....................................................................................49 2.5.2. Test Strip Introduction Section Belt Tension Adjustment ................................................50 2.5.3. Test Strip Identification Section Belt Tension Adjustment...............................................50 2.5.4. Nozzle Drive Belt Tension Adjustment ............................................................................51

3. Sampler Adjustment Items, Jigs and Supplies (Sampler) ...............................................................52

4. Sampler Adjustments ..........................................................................................................................53 4.1. Measurement Side Lever PI Adjustment......................................................................................53 4.2. Measurement Side Lever Interlock Adjustment ...........................................................................54 4.3. Belt Tension Adjustment ..............................................................................................................55

4.3.1. Sample Rack Longitudinal Feed Belt Tension Adjustment .............................................55 4.3.2. Sample Rack Lateral Feed Belt Tension Adjustment......................................................55

4.4. Lateral Feed Lever Angle Adjustment..........................................................................................56 4.5. STAT Port Holder Height Adjustment ..........................................................................................57 4.6. Rack ID Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment........................................................................................58 4.7. Sensor Panel Angle Adjustment ..................................................................................................60 4.8. Longitudinal Feed Pulley Height Adjustment ...............................................................................61

5. Barcode Reader Adjustments.............................................................................................................62 5.1. Barcode Reader Installation.........................................................................................................62

Page 168: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-2

1. Adjustment Items, Tools and Supplies (Main Body)

1.1. Adjustment Items, Tools and Supplies

Section Adjustment item Jig/Supplies Doc. No./Code1.1 Feeder Sensor Adjustment White check strip 54-70632 1.2 Test Strip Identification Section

Sensor Adjustment White check strip 54-70632

1.3 Test Strip Transport Section Speed Adjustment

- -

1.4 Reflection Optical Unit LED Luminosity Adjustment

White check strip 54-70632

1.5 Turbidity/Colorimeter LED Luminosity and Amp Gain Adjustment

- -

1.6 Liquid Sensor Board Adjustment Shortcut connector 74-13007 1.7 Power Supply Relay Board

Adjustment - -

2 Calibration for Turbidity and Hb Measurement

- -

White check strip 54-70632 3.1 Test Strip Introduction Section Pulse Adjustments Shortcut connector 74-13007

Staining height adjustment jig 74-12633 3.2 Nozzle Drive Pulse Adjustments Shortcut connector 74-13007

3.3 Feeder Pulse Adjustment - - 4.1 Test Strip Reaction Section

Positioning Staining height adjustment jig 74-12633

4.2 Test Strip Introduction Section Positioning

Introduction anchoring block 64-10117

4.3 Nozzle Drive Positioning - - 4.4 Test Strip Identification Section

Positioning - -

4.5 Pump Positioning - - 4.6 Reflection System Sensors

Positioning - -

4.7 Introduction Arm Positioning - - 4.8 Washing Bath Positioning - - 4.9 Sample Tube Sensor Positioning Shortcut connector 74-13007 4.10 Outer Cover Open-Closed Detectors

Positioning - -

5 Belt Tension Adjustment - - [NOTE] Confirm and use the most recent version of jig drawings.

Page 169: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-3

2. Adjustments (Main Body)

2.1. Main Body Electrical Adjustments

2.1.1. Feeder Sensor Adjustment What to Prepare White check strip (54-70632) x 1

Adjustment Procedure

2.1.1.1. Feeder 1 Test Strip Front and Back Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment 1. Clean inside the feeder. 2. Enter the user mode. 3. Set the main feeder to feeder 1. 4. Enter the service mode. 5. Select the options in order of “7:System”, “4:Adjustment”, and “4:A/D volume adjustment”. 6. Select “1:Strip detect (Feeder 1)” and check the below screen appears.

7. Check the below screen appears, then set a check strip in the feeder 1 slot with the backside facing up and press OK .

Strip detect(Feeder 1) (7441) 2006-03-30 10:31 Initializing… Please wait…

Strip detect(Feeder 1) (7441) 2006-03-30 10:31 Set strip to feeder OK Go back

Page 170: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-4

8. The below screen will appear. Wait for automatic adjustment to end.

9. The below window will appear. Wait without shutting off the power until processing ends.

Strip detect(Feeder 1) (7441) 2006-03-30 10:31 Automatic adjusting Please wait for a moment

Strip detect(Feeder 1) (7441) 2006-03-30 10:31 (V) VOL. OnOff 4.00 186 UpDo 39 wn 4.00 1Saving changes…

Keep power on.

10. The below screen will appear. Check the settings are within the standard ranges and press Go back .

Strip detect(Feeder 1) (7441) 2006-03-30 10:32 (V) VOL. OnOff 4.00 186 UpDown 4.00 139 Go back

Standard ranges: (V)=3.90 to 4.10V (Midpoint: 4.00V) VOL.=0 to 255 clicks (Midpoint: 200 clicks)

[TIP] If the values are out of range, carefully check the surface of the check strip and inside the instrument

for contamination and foreign matter. If the situation still does not improve, check the sensor, the boards of the qualitative analysis machine driver and PMC sub-CPU2, and connector wiring from the sensor to these boards (see the “General Wiring Diagrams” for details).

Page 171: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-5

11. The below screen will appear. Wait until initialization ends.

Initializing… Please wait…

Strip detect(Feeder 1) (7441) 2006-03-30 10:32

12. The below screen will appear. Remove the check strip from feeder 1. This completes test strip front and back sensor sensitivity adjustment for feeder 1. To end instrument electrical adjustments, press Go back .

A/D volume adjust

(7440) 2006-03-30 10:32 1 Strip detect(Feeder 1) 2 Strip detect(Feeder 2) 3 Hand speed 4 Pad detect 5 Reflection system 6 Flow system Go back

Page 172: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-6

2.1.1.2. Feeder 2 Test Strip Front and Back Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment 1. Clean inside the feeder. 2. Enter the user mode. 3. Set the main feeder to feeder 2. 4. Enter the service mode. 5. Select the options in order of “7:System”, “4:Adjustment”, and “4:A/D volume adjustment”. 6. Select “2:Strip detect(Feeder 2)” and check the below screen appears.

7. Check the below screen appears, then set a check strip in the feeder 2 slot with the backside facing up and press OK

Strip detect(Feeder 2) (7442) 2006-03-30 10:31 Initializing… Please wait…

Strip detect(Feeder2) (7442) 2006-03-30 10:31 Set strip to feeder OK Go back

Page 173: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

8. The below screen will appear. Wait for automatic adjustment to end.

9. The below screen will appear. Wait without shutting off the power until processing ends.

10. The below screen will appear. Check the settings are within the standard ranges and press Go back .

Strip detect(Feeder 2) (7442) 2006-03-30 10:31 Automatic adjusting Please wait for a moment

Strip detect(Feeder 2) (7442) 2006-03-30 10:31 (V) VOL. OnOff 4.00 186 UpD 139 own 4.00

Saving changes… Keep power on.

Standa

[TIP]

Strip detect(Feeder 2) (7442) 2006-03-30 10:32

(V) VOL. OnOff 4.00 186 UpDown 4.00 139

Go back

6-7

rd ranges:(V)=3.90 to 4.10V (Midpoint: 4.00V) VOL.=0 to 255 clicks (Midpoint: 200 clicks)

If the values are out of range, carefully check the surface of the check strip and inside the instrument for contamination and foreign matter. If the situation still does not improve, check the sensor, the boards of the qualitative analysis machine driver and PMC sub-CPU2, and connector wiring from the sensor to these boards (see the “General Wiring Diagrams” for details).

Page 174: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-8

11 The below screen will appear. Wait until initialization ends.

12. The below screen will appear. Remove the check strip from feeder 2. This completes test strip front and back sensor sensitivity adjustment for feeder 2. (To end instrument electrical adjustments, press Go back .)

Strip detect(Feeder 2) (7442) 2006-03-30 10:32 Initializing… Please wait…

A/D volume adjust (7440) 2006-03-30 10:32 1 Strip detect(Feeder 1) 2 Strip detect(Feeder 2) 3 Hand speed 4 Pad detect 5 Reflection system 6 Flow system

Go back

Page 175: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-9

2.1.2. Test Strip Transport Section Speed Adjustment

Adjustment Procedure 1. Enter the service mode. 2. Select the options in order of “7:System”, “4:Adjustment”, and “4:A/D volume adjustment”. 3. Select “3:Hand speed”. 4. The below screen will appear. Wait for automatic adjustment to end.

5. The below window will appear. Wait without shutting off the power until processing ends.

6. A screen similar to that below will appear. Check the settings are within the standard range.

Hand speed (7444) 2006-03-30 10:36 (sec) VOL. Speed 2.5 145

Hand speed (7444) 2006-03-30 10:35 Automatic adjusting Please wait for a moment.

Hand speed (7444) 2006-03-30 10:36 (sec) VOL. Speed 2.5 145 UpDo 139 wn 4.00

Saving changes… Keep power on.

Standard range:(sec)=2.3~2.6s(Midpoint: 2.5s) VOL.=0 to 255 clicks (Midpoint: 200 clicks)

[TIP] If the values are out of range, carefully check inside the instrument for foreign matter. If the situation

still does not improve, check the transport motor, initializer PI, the boards of the qualitative analysis machine driver and PMC sub-CPU2, and connector wiring from the motor and PI to these boards (see the “General Wiring Diagrams” for details).

Page 176: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

2.1.3. Test Strip Identification Section Sensor Adjustment

What to Prepare White check strip (54-70632) x 1 Adjustment Procedure 1. Clean the waste box. (The check strip is discarded to the waste box at the end of adjustment.) 2. Enter the service mode. 3. Select the options in order of “7:System”, “4:Adjustment”, and “4:A/D volume adjustment”. 4. Select “4:Pad detect”. 5. The below screen will appear. Set a check strip in the main feeder slot with the backside facing up and

press OK .

6. The be

The be

S

A

Pad detect (7443) 2006-03-30 10:32

et strip to feeder

OK Go back

6-10

low screen will appear. Wait for automatic adjustment to end.

low window will appear. Wait without shutting off the power until processing ends.

Pad detect (7443) 2006-03-30 10:33

(V) VOL. OnOff 4.02 242 UpDown 4.00 139

Pad detect (7443) 2006-03-30 10:33

utomatic adjusting

Please wait for a moment.

Keep power on. Saving changes…

Page 177: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-11

8. A screen similar to that below will appear. Check the settings are within the standard ranges and press Go back.

Pad detect (7443) 2006-03-30 10:33 (V) VOL. Pad 4.02 242 Mark 4.00 139 Sensor pulse 146 Marker offset -6

Go back

Standard ranges:(V)=3.90 to 4.10V (Midpoint: 4.00V) VOL.=0 to 255 clicks (Midpoint: 200 clicks) Sensor pulse 145 to 165 (Midpoint: 155) Marker offset -10 to 0 (Midpoint: -5)

[TIP] If the values are out of range, carefully check the surface of the check strip and inside the

instrument for contamination and foreign matter. If the situation still does not improve, check the sensor, the boards of the identification section relay, qualitative analysis machine driver, and PMC sub-CPU2, and connector wiring from the sensor to these boards (see the “General Wiring Diagrams” for details).

9. The below screen will appear. Wait until initialization ends.

10. The below screen will appear. Remove the check strip from the waste box. This completes test strip identification section sensor adjustment. (To end instrument electrical adjustments, press Go back.)

A/D volume adjust (7440) 2006-03-30 10:32 1 Strip detect(Feeder 1) 2 Strip detect(Feeder 2) 3 Hand speed 4 Pad detect 5 Reflection system 6 Flow system

Go back

Pad detect (7443) 2006-03-30 10:34 Initializing… Please wait…

Page 178: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-12

2.1.4. Reflection Optical Unit LED Luminosity Adjustment

What to Prepare White check strip (54-70632) x 1 Adjustment Procedure 1. Clean the white plate. 2. Clean the waste box. (The check strip is discarded to the waste box at the end of adjustment.) 3. Enter the service mode. 4. Select the options in order of “7:System”, “4:Adjustment”, and “4:A/D volume adjustment”. 5. Select “5:Reflection system” and check the below screen appears.

Reflection system (7445) 2006-03-30 10:36 Initializing… Please wait…

6. The below screen will appear. Set a white check strip in the main feeder slot with the backside facing up and press OK .

Reflection system (7445) 2006-03-30 10:36 Set strip to feeder OK Go back

7. The below screen will appear. Wait for automatic adjustment to end. Reflection system

(7445) 2006-03-30 10:37 Automatic adjusting Please wait for a moment.

Page 179: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

8. A screen similar to that below will appear. Check the measured values are within the standard ranges and press Go back.

[NOTE

Standa

[TIP]

9. The be

10. A screreflecti

123456

Reflection system (7445) 2006-03-30 10:36

WL A/D-VOL A/D-VOL A/D-VOL 430nm 1205- 75 1206- 76 1206- 72 500nm 1214- 38 1237- 39 1238- 41 565nm 1203-104 1203- 92 1208-112 635nm 1218-100 1206-103 1214-100 760nm 1232- 55 1217- 48 1222- 49 945nm 2007-130 2007-130 2007-130

Go back

6-13

] The white plate is used to adjust the 430 to 760 nm range and the white check strip, to adjust 945 nm.

rd ranges:430 to 760 nm A/D=1100 to 1300 clicks (Midpoint: 1200 clicks ) VOL.=0 to 255 clicks (Midpoint: 127 clicks ) 945 nm A/D=1900 to 2100 clicks (Midpoint: 2000 clicks ) VOL.= 0 to 255 clicks (Midpoint: 127 clicks )

If the values are out of range, carefully check the surface of the check strip and inside the instrument for contamination and foreign matter. If the situation still does not improve, check the boards of the reflectance head amp and qualitative analysis machine AD sub-CPU2, and connector wiring between these boards (see the “General Wiring Diagrams” for details).

low screen will appear. Wait until initialization ends.

en similar to that below will appear. Remove the check strip from the waste box. This completes on system LED luminosity adjustment. (To end instrument electrical adjustments, press Go back.)

Pad detect (7443) 2006-03-30 10:36

Initializing…

Please wait…

A/D volume adjust (7440) 2006-03-30 10:36

Strip detect(Feeder 1) Strip detect(Feeder 2) Hand speed Pad detect Reflection system Flow system

Go back

Page 180: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-14

2.1.5. Turbidity/Colorimeter LED Luminosity and Amp Gain Adjustment

What to Prepare Turbidity standard solution 2 mL Sample tube x 1

Adjustment Procedure 1. Enter the service mode. 2. Select the options in order of “7:System”, “4:Adjustment”, and “4:A/D volume adjustment”. 3. Select “6:Flow system”. 4. The below screen will appear. Set a sample tube with 2 mL or more of turbidity standard solution in the

STAT port and pres OK .

5. The below screen will appear. Wait for automatic adjustment to end.

Flow system (7446) 2006-03-30 10:28 Set calibrator to STAT port.

OK Go back

Flow system (7446) 2006-03-30 10:28 Automatic adjusting Please wait for a moment.

6. A screen similar to that below will appears. Check the settings are within the standard ranges and press Go back.

Flow system

(7446) 2006-03-30 10:29 Transmission A/D-VOL1-VOL2 Red 3214 141 Green 3219 97 Blue 3235 45 Scatter Red 3206 0- 187 Green 3204 0- 136 Blue 3204 0- 68 Go back

Page 181: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-15

Standard ranges: Transmission A/D=2800 to 3600 clicks (Midpoint: 3200 clicks )

VOL1=0 to 255 clicks (Midpoint: 127 clicks ) Scatter A/D=3000 to 3400 clicks (Midpoint: 3200 clicks ) VOL1= 0 to 255 clicks (Midpoint: 0 clicks ) VOL2= 0 to 255 clicks (Midpoint: 255 clicks )

[TIP] If the values are out of range, carefully check the turbidity standard solution and inside the tubing for

foreign matter. If the situation still does not improve, check the connector wiring to the board that mounts the flow cell head amp, qualitative analysis machine AD sub-CPU2 (see the “General Wiring Diagrams” for details), and the board.

Page 182: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-16

2.1.6. Liquid Sensor Board Adjustment

What to Prepare Shortcut connector (74-13007) x 1 Phillips screwdriver (for M3 screws) x 1 Frequency counter x 1 Thread locking adhesive As needed

Adjustment Procedure 1. Turn off power to the instrument and detach the sampler. 2. Insert the shortcut connector into the connector shown below.

Insert as shown here.

3. Detach the center plate. 4. Turn on power to the instrument and enter the service mode. 5. Select the options in order of “7:System”, “4:Adjustment”, and ”2:Hard test”. 6. Select “3:Nozzle. 7. The below screen will appear. Wait until initialization ends.

Nozzle

(7423) 2006-03-30 10:36 Initializing… Please wait…

Page 183: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-17

8. A screen similar to that below will appear. Press Action .

9. A window similar to that below will appear. Press and hold the [-] key until “Nozzle action” reads ”Rack FB”, then press OK to move the nozzle to above the sampling position.

Nozzle (7423) 2006-03-30 10:36 FB INIT : OFF FB lock : ON FB adjust : ON UD INIT : ON UD・adjust : ON Sample : OFF Action Go back

Nozzle (7423) 2006-03-30 10:36 FB INIT : OFF FB lock : ON FB adjust : ON UD INIT :

OK Go back

Nozzle action [Rack FB ]

10. Connect the frequency counter to TP01 – TP02 (GND) of the liquid sensor board.

11. Set the frequency to within the standard range from VR01. Standard range: 75kHz±5kHz

12. Once set, coat VR01 with thread locking adhesive and disconnect the frequency counter. 13. Press Go back to end adjustment. 14. Turn off power to the instrument and disconnect the shortcut connector. 15. Reattach the sampler and center plate, and restore the instrument to its original state. This completes

adjustment.

Page 184: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-18

2.1.7. Power Supply Relay Board Adjustment

What to Prepare Phillips screwdriver(For M3 screw) x 1 Digital voltmeter x 1 Thread locking adhesive As needed Adjustment Procedure 1. Turn off power to the instrument. 2. Detach the rear panel. 3. Disconnect the connector wires from J25, J26 and J27 on the power supply relay board. 4. Turn on power to the instrument. 5. Connect the digital voltmeter to TP01 - TP02 (GND), then read and record the voltage to 2 digits below the

decimal.

6. Connect the digital voltmeter to TP03 - TP04 (GND) and set the voltage from VR01. Standard setting: Voltage read in step 2 ±0.10V

7. Once set, coat VR01 with thread locking adhesive. 8. Turn off power to the instrument and reattach the rear panel.

Page 185: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-19

2.2. Calibration for Turbidity and Hb Measurement

What to Prepare Sample tube x 2 Turbidity standard solution 2 mL Hb standard solution (equivalent to FOOD RED No.2=0.77 mg/dL, Hb=25 mg/dL) 2 mL

Calibration Procedure

2.2.1. Turbidity Measurement Calibration 1. Enter the service mode. 2. Select the options in order of “7:System”, “2:Calibration”, and ”1:TURB calibration”. 3. Type in the absorbance of the turbidity standard solution and press OK .

4. Set a sample tube with 2 mL or more of turbidity standard solution in the STAT port and press Start .

5. Wait until automatic calibration is complete. Once the message “Calibration has finished.” appears, press Go back a few times to end calibration.

TURB calibration (7210) 2006-03-30 10:36 Standard <1.000>

BS OK Go back

TURB calibration (7210) 2006-03-30 10:36 Analyzing Please wait for a moment.

Go back

TURB calibration (7210) 2006-03-30 10:36 Calibration has finished.

TURB calibration (7210) 2006-03-30 10:36 Set calibrator to STAT port. Start Go back

Page 186: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-20

2.2.2. Hb Measurement Calibration

1. Enter the service mode. 2. Select the options in order of “7:System”, “2:Calibration”, and “2:Hb calibration”. 3. Type in the concentration of the Hb standard solution and press OK . (For 25 mg/dL, type in “25”.)

4. Set a sample tube with 2 mL or more of Hb standard solution in the STAT port and press Start .

5. Wait until automatic calibration is complete. Once the message “Calibration has finished.” appears, press Go back a few times to end calibration.

Hb calibration (7220) 2006-03-30 10:36 Standard <25>

BS OK Go back

Hb calibration (7220) 2006-03-30 10:36 Set calibrator to STAT port. Start Go back

Hb calibration (7220) 2006-03-30 10:36 Analyzing Please wait for a moment.

Go back

Hb calibration (7220) 2006-03-30 10:36 Calibration has finished.

Page 187: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-21

2.3. Main Body Pulse Adjustment

2.3.1. Test Strip Introduction Section Pulse Adjustments

What to Prepare Shortcut connector(74-13007) x 1 White check strip (54-70632) x1

2.3.1.1. Introduction Section Sample Staining Position Pulse Adjustment 1. Turn off power to the instrument and detach the sampler. 2. Insert the shortcut connector into the connector shown below.

3. Turn on power to the instrument and enter the service mode. 4. Select the options in order of “7:System”, “4:Adjustment”, “3:Pulse adjust”, and “2: Introduction”. 4. Select ‘Drop” for ”Adjustment item” and press OK .

6. Open the front cover, maintenance cover, feeder protective cover and side panel, and tilt the feeder unit down to the right.

Insert as shown here.

Introduction (7432) 2006-03-30 10:36 Adjustment item [Drop ]

OK Cancel

Page 188: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-22

7. Place a check strip at the sample staining position and adjust the pulses until the introduction arm contacts

the check strip.

Introduction (7432) 2006-03-30 10:36 Drop 2049〈-1032〉 * ************* Operat ion ************** 4 key: -1 7 key: +1 6 key: -10 9 key: +10 * ***************************************

OK Cancel

8. Move the introduction arm another 14 pulses (0.49 mm) in the same direction as step 7 from the position established in step 7.

9. Remove the check strip and press OK to end adjustment. 10. Turn on power to the instrument and disconnect the shortcut connector. 11. Reattach the sampler and restore the instrument to its original state. This completes adjustment.

2.3.1.2. Introduction Section Test Strip Identification Position and Test Strip Reception Position Pulse Adjustment

1. Turn off power to the instrument and detach the sampler. 2. Insert the shortcut connector into the connector shown below.

3. Turn on power to the instrument and enter the service mode.

Insert as shown here.

Page 189: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-23

4. Select the options in order of “7:System”, “4:Adjustment”, “3:Pulse adjust”, and ”2: Introduction”. 5. To adjust the test strip identification position, select “Judge” for ”Adjustment item” and press OK .

6. Open the front cover, maintenance cover, feeder protective cover and side panel, and tilt the feeder unit down to the right.

7. Press a check strip against the return prevention rib at the identification position on the introduction tray and adjust the pulses until the introduction arm contacts the check strip.

8. Press the introduction arm inward another 4 pulses (0.14 mm) from the position established in step 7. 9. Remove the check strip and press OK to end adjustment. 10. Turn on power to the instrument and disconnect the shortcut connector. 11. Reattach the sampler and restore the instrument to its original state. This completes adjustment.

Introduction (7432) 2006-03-30 10:36 Drop 2049〈-1032〉 * ************* Operat ion ************** 4 key: -1 7 key: +1 6 key: -10 9 key: +10 * *************************************** OK Cancel

Introduction (7432) 2006-03-30 10:36 Adjustment item [Judge ] OK Cancel

Return prevention rib

[TIP] To adjust the test strip reception position, do the following after step 4 above. 5. Select “Receive” for ”Adjustment item” and press OK . 6. Open the front cover, maintenance cover, feeder protective cover and side panel, and tilt the feeder unit

down to the right. 7. Adjust the pulses so that the distance from the tip of the introduction arm to the end face of the projection on

the introduction tray is 2 mm (+1.0/-0 mm).

2 mm

8. Press OK to end adjustment. 9. Turn on power to the instrument and disconnect the shortcut connector. 10. Reattach the sampler and restore the instrument to its original state. This completes adjustment.

Page 190: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-24

2.3.2. Nozzle Drive Nozzle Adjustments

What to Prepare Shortcut connector (74-13007) x 1 Sample rack x 1 Sample tube x 1 Sample staining height adjustment jig (74-12633) x 1 Phillips screwdriver (For M3 screw) x 1 Hex head wrench (2.5 jaw) x 1

Adjustment Procedure

2.3.2.1. Nozzle Back-and-Forth Positioning at the Washing Bath

1. Turn off power to the instrument. 2. Detach the sampler and center plate. 3. Insert the shortcut connector into the connector shown below.

4. Turn on power to the instrument and enter the service mode. 5. Select the options in order of “7:System”, “4:Adjustment”, “3:Pulse adjust”, and “3: Nozzle”. 6. Select “Wash FB” for ”Adjustment item” and press OK .

Insert as shown here.

Nozzle (7433) 2006-03-30 10:36 Adjustment item [Wash FB ] OK Cancel

Page 191: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6

7. Open the front cover and adjust the nozzle so that the tip is centered on the hole in the washing bath.

Positional tolerance: ±0.2 mm

Front-Back position reference

Nozzle (7433) 2006-03-30 10:36 Wash FB PI:1 1794〈- 3〉 * ************* Operat ion ************** 4 key: -1 7 key: +1 6 key: -10 9 key: +10 5 key: -10(UD) 8 key: +10(UD) * *************************************** OK Cancel

8. Adjust the interlock slit to the center of the PI sensor.

First, loosen the adjusting screws that lock down the slit plate and slide the plate to the front and back to position. Then, tighten the screws when the slit is centered to the eye. Press OK to end adjustment.

Adjusting screws

9. If not making other adjustments, turn off powerstate. This completes adjustment.

Slit

-25

to the instrument and restore the instrument to its original

Page 192: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-26

2.3.2.2. Nozzle Up-and-Down Positioning at the Washing Bath

1. Detach the sampler and front cover. 2. Enter the service mode. 3. Select the options in order of “7:System”, “4:Adjustment”, “3:Pulse adjust”, and “3: Nozzle”. 4. Select “Wash UD” for “Adjustment item” and press OK .

5. Adjust the nozzle so that the tapered section of the nozzle is aligned with the tapered section inside the washing bath as shown in the below cross-sectional view, and press OK . Positional tolerance:±0.2 mm

Up-and-down position reference Cross-sectional view

Nozzle (7433) 2006-03-30 10:36 Wash UD 716〈+ 14〉 * ************* Operat ion ************** 4 key: -1 7 key: +1 6 key: -10 9 key: +10 * ************************************** OK Cancel

Nozzle (7433) 2006-03-30 10:36 Adjustment item [Wash UD ] OK Cancel

Position reference

Washing bath

Nozzle

6. If not making other adjustments, turn off power to the instrument and restore the instrument to its original state. This completes adjustment.

Page 193: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-27

2.3.2.3. Standard Sample Aspiration Back-and-Forth Positioning

1. Set one sample tube in the sample rack and set the rack in the sampling position. 2. Enter the service mode. 3. Select the options in order of “7:System”, “4:Adjustment”, “3:Pulse adjust”, and “3: Nozzle”. 4. Select “Rack FB” for “Adjustment item” and press OK .

5. A screen similar to that below will appear. Adjust the nozzle so that the tip is centered on the sample tube. Positional tolerance: ±1.0 mm

Back-and forth position reference

Nozzle (7433) 2006-03-30 10:36 Rack FB PI:1 2375〈- 20〉 * ************* Operat ion ************** 4 key: -1 7 key: +1 6 key: -10 9 key: +10 * *************************************** OK Cancel

Nozzle (7433) 2006-03-30 10:36 Adjustment item [Rack FB ] OK Cancel

6. If not making other adjustments, end here and remove the sample rack.

Page 194: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-28

2.3.2.4. Standard Sample Aspiration Up-and-Down Positioning

1. Set one sample tube in the sample rack and set the rack in the sampling position. 2. Enter the service mode. 3. Select the options in order of “7:System”, “4:Adjustment”, “3:Pulse adjust”, and “3: Nozzle”. 4. A screen similar to that below will appears. Select “Rack UD” for “Adjustment item” and press OK .

5. Adjust the nozzle so that the tip is between the 0.1 mL and 0.2 mL base lines. Positional tolerance: ±2.5 mm

Up-and-down position reference

6. If not making other adjustments, end here and remove the sample rack.

Nozzle (7433) 2006-03-30 10:36 Rack UD 1525〈+ 20〉 * ************* Operat ion ************** 4 key: -1 7 key: +1 6 key: -10 9 key: +10 * *************************************** OK Cancel

Nozzle (7433) 2006-03-30 10:36 Adjustment item [Rack UD ] OK Cancel

0.1 mL base line

0.2 mL base line

Page 195: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-29

2.3.2.5. STAT Port Sample Aspiration Back-and-Forth Positioning 1. Detach the center plate and set a sample tube in the STAT port. 2. Enter the service mode. 3. Select the options in order of “7:System”, “4:Adjustment”, “3:Pulse adjust”, and “3: Nozzle”. 4. A screen similar to that below will appear. Select “STAT FB” for “Adjustment item” and press OK .

5. A screen similar to that below will appear. Adjust the nozzle so that the tip is centered on the sample tube. Positional tolerance:±1.0 mm

Front-Back position reference

6. Adjust the interlock slit to the center of the PI sensor. First, loosen the adjusting screws that lock down the slit plate and slide the plate to the front and back to position. Then, tighten the screws when the slit is centered to the eye. Press OK to end adjustment.

Nozzle (7433) 2006-03-30 10:36 STAT FB PI:1 2875〈- 20〉 * ************* Operat ion ************** 4 key: -1 7 key: +1 6 key: -10 9 key: +10 * *************************************** OK Cancel

Nozzle (7433) 2006-03-30 10:36 Adjustment item [STAT FB ] OK Cancel

Eliminate any gapping between plates. Slit

Adjusting screws

Page 196: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-30

7. If not making other adjustments, turn off power to the instrument and restore the instrument to its original state. This completes adjustment.

2.3.2.6. STAT Port Sample Aspiration Up-and-Down Positioning

1. Enter the service mode. 2. Select the options in order of “7:System”, “4:Adjustment”, “3:Pulse adjust”, and “3: Nozzle”. 3. A screen similar to that below will appear. Select “STAT UD” for “Adjustment item” and press OK .

4. Type in the number of pulses same as that for “2.3.2.4 Sampling Up-Down Position Adjustment”.

6. If not making other adjustments, end here.

Nozzle (7433) 2006-03-30 10:36 STAT UD 1525〈+ 50〉 * ************* Operat ion ************** 4 key: -1 7 key: +1 6 key: -10 9 key: +10 * *************************************** OK Cancel

Nozzle (7433) 2006-03-30 10:36 Adjustment item [STAT UD ] OK Cancel

Page 197: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-31

2.3.2.7. Sample Staining Positioning

1. Disable outer cover open-closed detection (see steps 1 to 3 in “2.3.2.1 Nozzle Back-and-Forth Positioning at

the Washing Bath”). 2. Turn on power to the instrument and enter the service mode. 3. Select the options in order of “7:System”, “4:Adjustment”, “3:Pulse adjust”, and “3: Nozzle”.

<Back-and-Forth Position> 4. Select “Drop FB” for “Adjustment item” and press OK .

5. Open the front cover, set the sample staining height adjustment jig (74-12633) in the sample staining position. Adjust the pulses so that the nozzle does not contact the reference holes on the adjustment jig. Positional tolerance: ±0.5 mm

<Up-and-Down Position: Rear> 6. Select “Drop UD S” for “Adjustment item” and press OK .

Nozzle (7433) 2006-03-30 10:36 Drop FB 250〈+ 15〉 * ************* Operat ion ************** 4 key: -1 7 key: +1 6 key: -10 9 key: +10 * *************************************** OK Cancel

Nozzle (7433) 2006-03-30 10:36 Adjustment item [Drop FB ] OK Cancel

Nozzle (7433) 2006-03-30 10:36 Adjustment item [Drop UD S ] OK Cancel

Page 198: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-32

7. Adjust the pulses so that the nozzle is just above the adjustment jig without contacting it.

Positional tolerance: ±0 to -0.16 mm

<Up-Down Position: Front> 8. Select “Drop UD E” for “Adjustment item” and press OK .

9. Adjust the pulses so that the nozzle is just above the adjustment tool without contacting it. Positional tolerance: ±0 to -0.16 mm

Nozzle (7433) 2006-03-30 10:36 Drop UD S 686〈+ 15〉 * ************* Operat ion ************** 4 key: -1 7 key: +1 6 key: -10 9 key: +10 * *************************************** OK Cancel

Nozzle (7433) 2006-03-30 10:36 Adjustment item [Drop UD E ] OK Cancel

OK Cancel

Nozzle (7433) 2006-03-30 10:36 Drop UD E 686〈+ 15〉 * ************* Operat ion ************** 4 key: -1 7 key: +1 6 key: -10 9 key: +10 * ***************************************

10. Press OK to end. 11. If not making other adjustments, turn off power to the instrument and restore the instrument to its original

state. This completes adjustment.

Page 199: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-33

2.3.3. Feeder Pulse Adjustment

1. Enter the service mode. 2. Select the options in order of “7:System”, “4:Adjustment”, “3:Pulse adjust”, and “1: Feeder”. 3. Select “Initialize” for “Adjustment item” and press OK .

4. Open the feeder covers and locate the partition plate rib and drum groove. 5. Adjust the pulses so that the edge of the partition plate aligns with the edge of the drum groove.

6. Press OK to end.

Feeder (7431) 2006-03-30 10:36 Adjustment item [Initialize ] OK Cancel

OK Cancel

Feeder (7431) 2006-03-30 10:36 Initialize 111〈+ 4〉 * ************* Operat ion ************** 4 key: -1 7 key: +1 6 key: -10 9 key: +10 * **************************************

Adjust pulses so that partition plate edge alignswith drum groove edge.
Page 200: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-34

2.4. Unit Positioning

2.4.1. Test Strip Reaction Section Positioning

What to Prepare Sample staining height adjustment jig (74-12633) x 1 Ballpoint driver (3.0 jaw) x 1

Adjustment Procedure 1. Set the transfer tray in the test strip reaction section. 2. Press the sample staining height adjustment jig against the lateral sample staining position stopper ribs on

the transport tray. 3. Adjust the nozzle so that the center pipe is inserted into both of the front and rear reference holes of the jig.

Positional tolerance: ±0.5 mm

There are 4 adjusting screws.

Adjusting screw

Adjusting screws

Adjusting screws

Adjusting screw

Page 201: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-35

2.4.2. Test Strip Introduction Section Positioning

What to Prepare Introduction section locking block (64-10117) x 1 Phillips screwdriver (For M3 screw) x 1 Adjustment Procedure 1. Set up the test strip introduction section assembly in a partially locked down state. 2. Set the introduction section locking block as shown below and lock down the test strip introduction section

assembly. 3. Once tight, detach the introduction section locking block.

Base block surface

End face of metal plate for connecting arm assembly

Press introduction section locking block againstabove 2 surfaces and lock down test strip introduction section assembly.

Page 202: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-36

2.4.3. Nozzle Drive Positioning

What to Prepare Hex head wrench (3.0 jaw) x 1 Thread locking adhesive・ As needed

Adjustment Procedure 1. Press the bottom face of the LM guide of the nozzle back-and-forth drive against the base blocks as shown

below. 2. Press the end face of the metal plate of the nozzle back-and-forth drive against the base block as shown

below. 3. Tighten screws and coat them with thread locking adhesive.

Contact these surfaces.

Contact this surface.

Page 203: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-37

2.4.4. Test Strip Identification Section Positioning What to Prepare Hex head wrench (1.5 jaw) x 1 Phillips screwdriver (For M3 screw) x 1 Thread locking adhesive As needed

Adjustment Procedure 1. Press the bottom face of the LM guide against the base blocks as shown below. 2. Tighten screws and coat with thread locking adhesive.

Contact these surfaces.

Page 204: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-38

2.4.5. Pump Positioning What to Prepare Phillips screwdriver (For M3 screw) x 1

Adjustment Procedure 1. Position the back faces of the frame and pump flush with one another as shown below.

Position these surfaces flush with one another.

Page 205: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-39

2.4.6. Reflection System Sensors Positioning What to Prepare Phillips screwdriver (For M3 screw) x 1

2.4.6.1. Feeder Reflection System Sensor Positioning Adjustment Procedure 1. Position the top face of the reflection system sensor flush with the end face (shaded) of the metal plate as

shown below.

Position these surfaces flush with one another.

Page 206: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-40

2.4.6.2. Test Strip Identification Section Reflection System Sensor Positioning Adjustment Procedure 1. Fit the bottom face of the projections on the reflection system sensor on the bottom face (shaded) of the

punched slots in the metal plate, as shown below.

As installed

Fit sensor projections onto these surfaces.

Enlarged view

Page 207: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

2.4.7. Introduction Arm Positioning What to Prepare Phillips screwdriver (For M3 screw) x 1

Adjustment Procedure 1. Fit the introduction arm assembly into the openings in the metal plate as shown below, and lock in place.

Fit arm assembly h

6-41

Page 208: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-42

2.4.8. Washing Bath Positioning What to Prepare Hex head wrench (2.5 jaw) x 1

Adjustment Procedure 1. Press the metal plate of the washing bath assembly against the base blocks as shown below, and lock in

place.

Press against these surfaces.

Page 209: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-43

2.4.9. Sample Tube Sensor Positioning What to Prepare Shortcut connector (74-13007) x 1 Sample rack x 1 Sample tube x 1 Hex head wrench (2.5 jaw) x 1

Adjustment Procedure 1. Turn off power to the instrument and detach the sampler. 2. Insert the shortcut connector into the connector shown below.

Insert as

shown

3. Reattach the sampler, turn on power to the instrument and enter the service mode. 4. Set an empty sample tube in port 6 of the sample rack and set the rack in the sampler. 5. Select the options in order of “7:System”, “4:Adjustment”, and “2:Hard test”. 6. Select “5:Sampler” and check the below screen appears.

Sampler (7425) 2006-03-30 10:36 MEAS INIT : ON Carry INIT : ON MEAS port : OFF Carry right: OFF MEAS right: 00000 Carry left : OFF MEAS left : OFF Tube : OFF STAT port : OFF STAT tube : OFF Ready in : ON Start in : ON Action Go back

Page 210: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-44

7. Press Action , select “MEAS 1st” for “Sampler action” and press OK . The rack will be moved so that

the first port is to the front.

Sampler (7425) 2006-03-30 10:36 MEAS INIT : ON Carry INIT : ON MEAS port : OFF Carry right: OFF MEAS right: 00000 Carry left : OFF

AS left : OFF METube : OFF STAT port : OFF STAT tube : OFF Ready in : ON Start in : ON OK Cancel

Sampler action [MEAS 1st ]

8. Repeat the selection, Action , “MEAS port”, and OK , until the fifth port is in position. 9. Check the LED lights up a red color when it detects the sample tube, as shown below. 10. Open the front cover and loosen the screws that lock down the sample tube detector. 11. Slide the sensor left and right to measure the detection range.

Standard range: Detection range(Reference) 3 to 7 mm

[TIP] Position the sensor to the very front to slide.

12. Lock the screws with the sensor at the center of the detection range. Positional tolerance: Measured midpoint ±1 mm

13. Turn off power to the instrument and restore the instrument to its original state.

Page 211: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-45

2.4.10. Outer Cover Open-Closed Detectors Positioning What to Prepare Phillips screwdriver (For M3 screw) x 1

2.4.10.1. Front Cover Open-Closed Sensor Position Adjustment Adjustment Procedure With the front cover closed, move the sensor bracket frontward until hearing it catch. Lock the bracket in place where the switch is depressed. [TIP] The sensor is properly positioned when the end face of the frame and the end face of the sensor

bracket are flush, as shown below.

Spy hole

Adjusting screw

Adjusting screw

OK when 0.5 to 1.5

Align this frame face and sensor bracket face.

Page 212: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

2.4.10.2. Maintenance Cover Open-Closed Sensor Positioning Adjustment Procedure With the maintenance cover closed, move the sensor bracket frontward until hearing it catch. Lock the bracket in place where the switch is depressed. [TIP] The sensor is properly positioned when the end face of the frame and the rear face of the sensor

bracket are flush, as shown below.

Seen from above

Position so these surfaces are coplanar.

6-46

Adjusting screw

Page 213: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

2.4.10.3. Side Cover Open-Closed Sensor Positioning Adjustment Procedure With the side cover closed, move the sensor bracket toward the side cover until hearing it catch. Lock the bracket in place where the switch is depressed. [TIP] The sensor is properly positioned when the end face of the frame and the end face of the sensor

bracket are flush, as shown below.

Align this frame face and senso

Adjusting screw

6-47

Spy hole

OK when 0.5 to 1.5

r bracket face.

Page 214: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-48

2.4.10.4. Feeder Protective Cover Open-Closed Sensor Positioning Adjustment Procedure With the feeder protective cover closed, move the sensor bracket upward until hearing it catch. Lock the bracket in place where the switch is depressed. [TIP] The sensor is properly positioned when the notched end face of the feeder cover retainer plate and the

end face of the sensor bracket are flush, as shown below.

Align this notched face and sensor bracket face. Adjusting screw

Spy hole

OK

whe

n 0.

5 to

1.5

Page 215: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-49

2.5. Belt Tension Adjustment What to Prepare Push-Pull scale (0 – 1 kg) x 1 Ruler x 1

2.5.1. Feeder Belt Tension Adjustment

Adjustment Procedure Apply 60 g of force with the push-pull scale on the midpoint of the belts, and measure the amount of flexure in the belts.

Flexure tolerance: Reverse drum belt・1.2 mm

Drum belt・0.7 mm

Drum belt

Reverse drum belt

Page 216: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-50

2.5.2. Test Strip Introduction Section Belt Tension Adjustment

Adjustment Procedure Applying 60 g of force with the push-pull scale on the midpoint of the belt, and measure the amount of flexure in the belt.

Flexure tolerance: 3.3 mm

2.5.3. Test Strip Identification Section Belt Tension Adjustment

Adjustment Procedure Apply 60 g of force with the push-pull scale on the midpoint of the belt, measure the amount of flexure in the belt.

Flexure tolerance: 3.6 mm

Test strip introduction section belt

Test strip identification section belt

Page 217: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

2.5.4. Nozzle Drive Belt Tension Adjustment

Adjustment Procedure Apply the below force with the push-pull scale on the midpoint of the belts, and measure the amount of flexure in the belts.

Positional tolerance: Force Flexure Back-and-forth drive belt 100 g 5.2 mm Up-and-down drive belt 60 g 3.5 mm

Up-and-down drive belt

6-51

Back-and-forth drive belt

Page 218: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-52

3. Sampler Adjustment Items, Jigs and Supplies (Sampler)

Adjustment Items, Jigs and Supplies

Section Adjustment item Jigs/Supplies Doc. No.l/Code(1) Measurement Side Lever PI Adjustment - - (2) Measurement Side Lever Interlock

Adjustment - -

(3) Belt Tension Adjustment Tension jig 74-05660 (4) Lateral Feed Lever Angle Adjustment - - (5) STAT Port Holder Height Adjustment - - (6) Rack ID Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment Rack ID adjustment paper (N-5)

Rack ID adjustment paper (N-8) Rack ID adjustment paper (N-8.5) Spacer

74-05657 74-05658 74-05659 74-05661

(7) Sensor Panel Angle Adjustment - - (8) Longitudinal Feed Pulley Height

Adjustment - -

[NOTE] Confirm and use the most recent version of jig drawings

Page 219: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-53

4. Sampler Adjustments

4.1. Measurement Side Lever PI Adjustment

What to Prepare Sample rack x 1 Phillips screwdriver (No. 2) x 1 Ballpoint driver (2.5 jaw) x 1 Thread locking adhesive As needed

Adjustment Procedure Connect the sampler’s connector to the instrument and set up the sampler. Send port 1 of the sample rack to the sampling position (center of sampler) by using the following procedure. 1. Enter the service mode. 2. Select “7:System”. 3. Select “4:Adjustment”. 4. Select “2:Hard test”. 5. Select “5:Sampler”. 6. Select [Initialize] to start initialization. 7. Select [MEAS 1st] to feed the rack lever to the position where the rack feeding starts from. 8. Select [MEAS port] twice to move port 1 of the sample rack to the sampling position.

Move the nozzle to the top of the sample rack by hand. When the nozzle is centered on port 1, lock the PI bracket. This completes adjustment. If not centered on the first port, move the PI bracket via the adjusting screw and repeat steps 1 to 3 in the below [TIP]. <Standard> 0±1.0 mm

[TIP] 1. If the sample rack has overrun the position, turn the adjusting screw clockwise. 2. If the sample rack is short of the position, turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise. 3. The sample rack moves 0.5 mm with each turn of the adjusting screw.

Page 220: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-54

4.2. Measurement Side Lever Interlock Adjustment

What to Prepare Hex head wrench (1.5 jaw) x 1

Adjustment Procedure Connect the sampler’s connector to the instrument. Remove the cap from the adjustment hole in the far left of the left top base.

Move the measurement-side rack lever to the position where rack feeding starts from by using the following procedure. 1. Enter the service mode. 2. Select “7:System”. 3. Select “4:Adjustment”. 4. Select “3:Pulse adjust”. 5. Select “5:Sampler”. 6. Press [MEAS 1st]. 7. On the resulting screen (pulse adjustment mode), the feed pulse will appear (default: 260).

Adjust the pulses to the midpoint of a predictive scale for sensor status “PI:1” (PI: bright), tighten the set screw of the dousing plate enough to keep from coming loose, with an hex head wrench . Check to see if the current scale for sensor status “PI:1” falls within the standard shown below by increasing or decreasing the pulses with the [4] and [7] keys. Once within the standard range, tighten the set screw definitively. Reattach the cap to the adjustment hole. <Standard> 260±6 pulse

[TIP] 1. The width of the dousing plate slit is about 20 pulses across.

Page 221: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-55

4.3. Belt Tension Adjustment

What to Prepare Push-pull scale (2 kg) x 1 Tension jig x 1 DC power supply (24V DC) x 1 String x 1

Adjustment Procedure

4.3.1. Sample Rack Longitudinal Feed Belt Tension Adjustment 1. Pull the belt upwards with the push-pull scale and read the load when the backside of the belt touches the

tension jig (8 mm). 2. Adjust belt tension so that the load is within the range of the standard tension shown below. 3. <Standard tension> 1.1 to 1.2 kgf (This is the initial tension. The range widens to 0.8 to 1.3 kgf after aging.) 4. After adjusting the tension, age for 50 hours. (To absorb initial elongation)

Push-Pull scale

Tension jig

Top base

Transport belt String

4.3.2. Sample Rack Lateral Feed Belt Tension Adjustment <Standard> As installed tension 1.6±0.1 kgf

Reference

6.56 mm

100 g

Page 222: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-56

4.4. Lateral Feed Lever Angle Adjustment

What to Prepare Phillips screwdriver (No. 2) x 1 Thread locking adhesive As needed

Adjustment Procedure 1. Adjust the measurement side lever and return side lever so that they stand vertical when locked down by the

retainer plate. Set the lever on the chassis and tighten the screws on both ends of the retainer plate so that the plate does not move. Adjust the position of the retainer plate so that the lever is the standard angle to the chassis bottom face. <Standard angle> A = 90 to 91 degree angle

Lever

Retainer plate

Page 223: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-57

4.5. STAT Port Holder Height Adjustment

What to Prepare Thickness gauge (0.15 mm) x 1 Wrench (8 jaw) x 1 Socket driver (8 jaw) x 1 Thread locking adhesive As needed

Adjustment Procedure 1. Adjust the height of the support beneath the STAT port loading position.

Press the STAT port into the loading position. Turn the support until the gap between the bottom plate attached to the STAT port bottom face and the support is the standard distance. Then, lock in place with the nut. <Standard gap> 0 to 0.1 mm (OK if a 0.15 mm thickness gauge cannot fit the gap)

STAT port

Bottom plate

Standard gap

Support

Nut

Page 224: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-58

4.6. Rack ID Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment

What to Prepare Rack ID adjustment paper (N-5) (74-05657) x 1 Rack ID adjustment paper (N-8) (74-05658) x 1 Rack ID adjustment paper (N-8.5) (74-05659) x 1 Spacer (74-05661) x 1 Digital voltmeter x 1 Thread locking adhesive As needed

Adjustment Procedure 1. Make preparations prior to adjustment.

Connect a digital voltmeter to TP1 and TP3 (GND) of the sampler 2 printed circuit board. Turn on power. Fit a sample rack with the rack ID adjustment paper (N-8.5) (74-05659) to the sample rack ID sensor. [NOTE] Be careful not to scratch the top surface of the paper. Set jumper JP1 of the sampler 2 printed circuit board to the B1 side. This enters the service mode and enables the sample rack ID sensor to be selected from SW1.

2. Adjust the sensitivity of the sample rack ID sensors.

1) The correspondence between SW1 and the sensors is shown below. SW1 No. Varistor Sensor No. 0 VR01 PI01 1 VR02 PI02 2 VR03 PI03 3 VR04 PI04 4 VR05 PI05

Set sensitivity so that the digital voltmeter reads as follows. Voltmeter reading Allowed error 1.500V ±0.030V

3. Check the operation.

Fit the sample rack with the sample rack ID adjustment paper (N-8) (74-05658) attached, to the spacer (74-05661) with the sensor between them. (The spacer keeps the sample rack and sensor 3 mm apart.) Fit a sample rack with the rack ID adjustment paper (N-8.5) (74-05659) attached, to the rack ID sensor. Then, check that the LED (D2) on the sampler 2 printed circuit board is out on all channels. Insert the spacer (74-05661) into a sample rack with the rack ID adjustment paper (N-8) (74-05658) attached, and fit the rack to the rack ID sensor. Then, check that the LED (D2) on the sampler 2 printed circuit board is lit on all channels. After checking all sensors, set JP1 of the sampler 2 printed circuit board to the A1 side. Lock the varistors with thread locking adhesive.

Page 225: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-59

JP1

TP3

TP1

Adjustment varistors VR01 to 05

Page 226: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-60

4.7. Sensor Panel Angle Adjustment

What to Prepare Sample rack x 1 Scale x 1 Ballpoint driver (2.5 jaw) x 1 Hex head wrench (5.5 jaw) x 1 Thread locking adhesive As needed

Adjustment Procedure 1. Adjust the angle of the 5-bit sensor panel (right top base) using the adjusting screw.

Lock the right top base to the chassis. Set the sample rack against the right wall. Adjust the angle of the panel using the adjusting screw until the gap between the right corner of the rack top surface and the panel is the standard distance. Once adjusted, lock the adjusting screw with the nut and coat with thread locking adhesive. <Standard gap> 0.5 to 1.0 mm Standard gap

Sample rack

Nut

Adjusting screw

Joint R

Right top base

Panel

Page 227: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-61

4.8. Longitudinal Feed Pulley Height Adjustment

What to Prepare Sample rack x 1 Thickness gauge (0.1 mm) x 1 Thickness gauge (0.25 mm) x 1 Thickness gauge (1.0 mm) x 1 DC power supply (24V DC) x 1 Phillips screwdriver (No. 2) x 1 Sample tube (Diameter: 15,L=100, containing water) x 2 Adhesive label x 8 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems, M3×8 SUS) x 1

Adjustment Procedure 1. Align the seams of the right and left belts. 2. Insert a 0.6-mm shim between the bottom face of the base mold and Oilless bearing. 3. Set sample tubes containing water in ports 1 and 10 of the adjustment rack.

Set the top base assembly on the chassis and lock in place at the center using 1 screw. Connect the motor to a power supply and run the motor until the belt seams come to the screw that is locking down the top base. Set the adjustment rack and check the clearance between the triangular rib and rack bottom face using the thickness gauges.

[TIP] To make it easier to check the clearance, place a 1-mm spacer on the base and pass the thickness

gauge between the spacer and the rack bottom face.

<Standard clearance>Passing: 0.1 mm, Stopped: 0.25 mm

If not the standard clearance, change the shim and repeat until the result falls within the standard clearance. Every time the shim is changed, run the motor again until the belt seams are at the screw that locks down the top base. Write the plate thickness of the decisive shim on an adhesive label and affix it near to the shim. Record the plate thickness of the decisive shim on the check sheet.

4 mm

0 mm

Adjustment rack

Left top base

Right top base

Check points

Lock screw here.Seams

Seams

Page 228: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Chapter 6 Adjustments AX-4030 Service Manual

6-62

5. Barcode Reader Adjustments

5.1. Barcode Reader Installation

What to Prepare Hex head wrench (1.5 jaw) x 1 Phillips screwdriver (For M3 screw) x 1 Barcode reader x 2 Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems, M3×8 SUS) x 3

Adjustment Procedure 1. Detach the front cover from the instrument. 2. Install the barcode reader on the bracket and tighten with the screws enough so that it does not come off

(Fig. 1). 3. Install the positioning screw for the barcode reader, press the barcode reader against the positioning screw

and tighten the screws definitively (Fig. 2). 4. Remove the positioning screw. 5. Clamp the wire (Fig. 3). 6. Connect the barcode reader wire to the connector in the instrument (Fig. 4). 7. Reattach the front cover to the instrument.

Fig. 1

Positioning screw Press barcode reader against positioning screw and lock in place.

Fig. 2

Fig. 3 Fig. 4

Page 229: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AX-4030 Service Manual

Appendix

No. Content Revision 1 Specification of printout contents B 2 Specification of the output data E 3 Functional specification E 4 Specification of the error D

Page 230: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix AX-4030 Service Manual

Page 231: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix AX-4030 Service Manual

Appendix 1

Specification of the printout contents

Page 232: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AX-4030 Service Manual

AP1-1

Appendix 1 Specification of printout contents

Contents

1. Introduction ······································································································································ 2

2. Printer Specifications ······················································································································ 2

3. Printed Reports ································································································································ 2 3.1. Print Formats·······································································································································2

4. Printed Report Formats ··················································································································· 3 4.1. Measurement Result ···························································································································3 4.2. Abnormal Results List ·························································································································7 4.3. Error and Trouble List (Automatic Report) ··························································································7 4.4. S.G. Calibration Result························································································································7 4.5. Trouble List (Manual) ··························································································································8 4.6. User Parameter Settings·····················································································································9 4.7. Check Measurement Result··············································································································10

4.7.1.Standard Format ······················································································································10 4.7.2.Detail Format (Service Mode) ··································································································10

4.8. S.G. Calibration Information (Service Mode) ····················································································11 4.9. Detailed Parameter Settings (Service Mode) ···················································································12 4.10. Test Strip Information (Service Mode) ······························································································14 4.11. Reagent Items Information (Service Mode) ······················································································15 4.12. Color Tone Settings (Service Mode)·································································································17 4.13. Pulse Settings (Service Mode)··········································································································18 4.14. User Setup (Service Mode)···············································································································20

Page 233: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AP1-2

1. Introduction This document contains the print specifications for the fully automated urine analyzer AX-4030.

2. Printer Specifications The following table lists the printer specifications. For detailed information, see the technical documents listed below. • IFH002-01B/IFH002-01BK Interface Board Technical Manual • PTH01P02 LTPH245 Controller CPU Technical Manual • PTH01P02 Thermal Printer Mechanism Technical Manual

Item Specifications 1. Manufacturer Seiko Instruments Inc. 2. Model (code) Thermal Line Printer (LTPH245 series) 3. Paper width (printable width) 58 mm (48 mm) 4. Total dots 384 dots 5. Printable digits Standard font: 24 digits 6. Max. print speed Max. 200 dot lines/s, 25 mm/s 7. Input/output method Parallel input/output

3. Printed Reports 3.1. Print Formats The supported printed reports are as listed below. Print examples are also given as well as descriptions of each item that appears on the reports. User mode

• Measurement result • Error and trouble list (automatic) • S.G. calibration result • Trouble list (manual) • Current parameter settings • Check measurement result (standard format)

Service mode

• Check measurement result (detail format)(service mode) • Test strip information(service mode) • Reagent items information (service mode) • User setup (service mode) • Detailed parameter settings(service mode) • Calibration result (service mode) • Pulse settings (service mode) • Color Tone Settings (service mode)

Page 234: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AP1-3

4. Printed Report Formats 4.1. Measurement Result Measurement results include results of normal samples, STAT samples and control samples. Below is an example of a typical printed report. | --------+---------1---------+---------2-------- | | Measure No.0001 | 1. Abnormal mark, type of measurement, measurement number | ID 123456789012345678 | 2. ID | 1999-11-29 21:41 28゚C | 3. Measurement date and time, and ambient temperature | Po.001-01 Strip 9UB(1) | 4. Rack-port number., type of test strip (feeder number)| ======================== | | GLU - mg/dl | 5. Abnormal mark, item name, qualitative value, | PRO - | semiquantitative/reflectivity | BIL - | | URO NORMAL | | PH 7.0 | | BLD - | | KET - | | NIT - | | LEU - | | TURB - | 6. Abnormal mark, qualitative value, turbidity value, error | S.G. 1.000 | 7. Abnormal mark, S.G. value, error | Color Coloeless | 8. Color tone | ======================== | | No sample | 9. Message | ======================== | | ------------------------------------------------ | 1. Abnormal mark, type of measurement, measurement number

An abnormal result is flagged with a black circle (●) or question mark (?).

●: The sample is positive or abnormally colored. ?: The instrument is operating abnormally.

The question mark has the priority against the black circle. The whole first line of the report appears in reverse video to make it immediately recognizable.

There are 6 types of measurements as listed below.

Measure: Normal measurement Stat: Port or rack STAT measurement Control-L: Low-density control measurement Control-M: Middle-density control measurement Control-H: High-density control measurement Check: Check measurement

Measurement numbers are from 0000 to 9999. <Example> |----+----1----+----2----| |----+----1----+----2----| |----+----1----+----2----| |●Stat No.9999 | |?Control-L No.9999 | | Control-M No.9999| |----+----1----+----2----| |----+----1----+----2----| | Control-H No.9999 | | Measure No.9999 |

2. ID

An ID can contain up to 18 characters, and shorter IDs are preceded by spaces to fill all the 18 digits. <Example> | Stat No.0001 | | Stat No.0001 | | Stat No.0001 | | ID 123456789012345678| | ID 90123| | ID |

Page 235: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AP1-4

3. Measurement date and time, and ambient temperature

The measurement date can be one of the following formats. The format is selected from the menu.

2005-04-08 09:53 08-04-2005 09:53 04-08-2005 09:53

Temperature is only printed out in Celsius.

<Example> | ID 1234567890123| | ID 1234567890123| | ID 1234567890123| | 2005-04-08 12:34 28゚C| | 08-04-2005 01:01 15゚C| | 04-08-2005 21:01 20゚C|

4. Rack-port number, type of strip (feeder number)

Rack number (number of racks from measurement start to the present) and port number (number assigned to the ports on the rack) are as follows.

e.g. For Po.001-05, the rack number is 001 and the port number 05. The type of the test strip used in measurement is printed. The feeder number represents which feeder supplies the test strip. <Example> | 1999-11-29 21:41 28゚C| | 1999-11-29 21:41 28゚C| | 1999-11-29 21:41 28゚C| | Po.999-01 Strip 9UB(1)| | Po.000-10 Strip 10EA(2)| | Po.001-01 Strip 8UA(1)|

5. Abnormal mark, item, name, qualitative value, semiquantitative/reflectivity*

The following abnormal marks are used.

(Blank): Normal (negative) *: Abnormal value (positive) !: Abnormal color (positive) The exclamation mark flag has a higher priority over the asterisk flag.

The measurement item name is printed in 4 letters. Kanji is printed only for Chinese specification analyzers.

e.g. GLU, PRO, BIL

Qualitative values are printed as “+”. “+-”, “NORMAL”, “OVER”, etc. , Whether to print semiquantitative values or reflectivity can be selected from the menu. When semiquantitative values are selected, density and its units are printed. When reflectivity is selected, the reflectivity and “%” are printed. <Example> | ***********************| | ***********************| | ***********************| |*GL 4+ OVER mg/dl| | GLU - mg/dl| | GLU +- 30 mg/dl| |!PRO 3+ 300 mg/dl| | PRO - mg/dl| | LEU - Leu/ul| | CRE 100 mg/dl| | P/C NORMAL <80mg/gCr| | P/C DILUTE mg/gCr|

| GLU - 83.0 %| | PRO - 87.3 %|

Page 236: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AP1-5

6. Abnormal mark, qualitative value, turbidity value, error

The following abnormal turbidity marks are used.

Normal: Blank Abnormal: “*”

Qualitative values are as follows.

Clear: “-” Turbid: “+1”, “1+”, “+ ” Dense turbid: “+2”, “2+”, “++”

Turbidity measurement values are printed when the instrument is set to the reflectivity mode. If an error occurs, one of the following is printed.

ERROR: Turbidity measurement was not performed for some reason. CAL. ERR.: The calibration result of the turbidity meter is abnormal.

<Example> | TURB - | |*TURB 2+ | | TURB CAL.ERR |

7. Abnormal mark, S.G. value, error

The following abnormal specific gravity marks are used.

(Blank): Normal !: The GLU and PRO correction is beyond capability (their results are shown as “OVER”). *: The S.G. value falls out of the upper or lower thresholds set in the service mode. The asterisk flag has a higher priority than the exclamation mark flag.

The following error can occur.

--------: Specific gravity was not measured for some reason. CAL. ERR.: S.G. calibration has not been performed yet. OVER: The S.G. value is higher than 1.055. UNDER: The S.G. value is lower than 0.995.

<Example>

| S.G. 1.000| |!S.G. OVER | |*S.G. 1.055|

Page 237: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AP1-6

8. Color tone

Color tone is printed according to evaluation results as follows.

“ COLORLESS” “ OTHER” Or, Density Reference color “YELLOW” “LIGHT” (Light) “ORANGE” “ ” (Normal) × “GREEN” “DARK” (Dark) “BLUE” “VIOLET” “RED” “BROWN”

If the result format is set to [Reflectivity], the color tone results are represented as [x] and [y]. <Example> | ***********************| | ***********************| | ***********************| | COLOR COLOELESS| | COLOR LIGHT YELLOW| | COLOR DARK BROWN | | C/M -9.999,Y/M -9.999 | | TONE 99.99 |

9. Message The following information on measurement or calculation errors that occur during measurement is printed in the message area.

No sample: No sample was detected. Skipped: The sample was not measured. Reflection light intensity drift: The light intensity is drifting. Excess reflectivity: The reflectivity was excessively high. Test strip out-of-position: The test strip was placed out of the correct position. Abnormal sampling: The nozzle could not spot the sample on the test strip.

|Test strip out-of-position|

JCCLS Support This mode supports printing in JCCLS format. It is basically the same as the standard mode, but the following rules are observed. PRO, GLU, LEU, S.G. and PH are printed as semiquantitative values, while all other items are printed as qualitative values. The standard format (sequence: item name, qualitative value and reflectivity) is used for all other information.

Page 238: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

4.2. Abnormal Results List Print format and items <Example> | --------+---------1---------+---------2-------- | | 2005-07-02 | 1.| Time No. Port | | 12:34 0001 001-05 | 2. | S.G. measurement error | 3.| ------------------------------------------------ | The abnormal results list reports abnormal measurement results. Printed lists contain the following information. 1. Measurement date (same as measurement results) 2. Measurement time, measurement number, rack-port number 3. Error message 4.3. Error and Trouble List (Automatic Report) Print format and items <Example> | --------+---------1---------+---------2-------- | | 1998-02-03 10:45 | 1. | E110 001 - 002 - 003 | 2. | ------------------------------------------------ | | 1998-02-03 10:45 | 1. | T210 123 - 345 - 567 | 2. | ------------------------------------------------ | The error and trouble list reports hardware troubles that interrupt measurement operations. Printed lists contain the following information.

1. Measurement date and time (same as measurement result reports) 2. Error code (“E” and 3-digit number) or trouble code (“T” and 3-digit number), and its detailed information (3-digit

number) 4.4. S.G. Calibration Result Print format and items

<Example> | --------+---------1---------+---------2-------- | | 1998-02-03 10:45 | 1. | S.G. Calibration | 2. | ------------------------------------------------ | The S.G. calibration result notification reports the end of specific gravity calibration. Notifications contain the following information. 1. Measurement date and time (same as measurement result reports) 2. End notification

AP1-7

Page 239: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AP1-8

4.5. Trouble List (Manual) Print format and items

<Example> | --------+---------1---------+---------2-------- | | 1998-02-03 10:45 | 1. | E110 001 - 002 - 003 | 2. | 1998-02-03 10:48 | 1. | T210 001 - 002 - 395 | 2. | 1998-02-03 10:49 | 1. | T214 143 - 234 - 512 | 2. | 1998-02-03 10:50 | 1. | T220 015 - 024 - 035 | 2. | 1998-02-03 11:54 | 1. | E122 011 - 302 - 400 | 2. | ------------------------------------------------ | The trouble list prints a log of errors and troubles that occurred. 1. Measurement date and time (same as measurement result reports) 2. Error code (“E” and 3-digit number) or trouble code (“T” and 3-digit number), and its detailed information (3-digit

number)

Page 240: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AP1-9

4.6. User Parameter Settings Print format and items <Example> | --------+---------1---------+---------2-------- | | AX-4030 V01.00 | | Serial No.12345678 | | 2005-04-12 13:19 | 1.| ======================== | | Printer setup | | Use/No use | | [ ] | 2.| ======================== | | External output setup | | Use/No use | | [ ] | 3.| ======================== | | Beeper volume setting | | Beeper volume [ ] | 4.| ======================== | | Test strip setup | | Test strip in feeder 1 [ ] | 5.| Test strip in feeder 2 [ ] | 6.| Main feeder [ ] | 7.| ======================== | | Rack assignment for test strip | | #01 [1: 8UA] | 8.| #02 [1: 8UA] | | #03 [1: 8UA] | | #04 [1: 8UA] | | #05 [1: 8UA] | | #06 [1: 8UA] | | #07 [1: 8UA] | | #08 [1: 8UA] | | #09 [1: 8UA] | | #10 [1: 8UA] | | ======================== | | Result display format | | Sample | | [ ] | 9.| Control | | [ ] | 10.| ======================== | | Measurement No. setup | | Measurement start No. | | [ ] | 11.| Measurement No. | | [ ] | 12.| ------------------------------------------------ | The user parameters settings list contains the following information.

1. Date and time 2. Printer enabled/disabled 3. External output enabled/disabled 4. Beeper volume 5. Type of test strips in feeder 1 6. Type of test strips in feeder 2 7. Feeder specified as the main feeder 8. Item racks (rack IDs) and assigned test strips (feeder number) 9. Result format for samples 10. Result format for controls 11. Measurement start number assignment 12. Measurement number assignment

Page 241: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AP1-10

4.7. Check Measurement Result 4.7.1. Standard Format Print format and items

If an error occurs during measurement: | --------+---------1---------+---------2-------- | | CHECK | | 2005-04-12 14:10 | 1.| ======================== | | Strip deviate | 2.| ======================== | | 430[nm] 89.3% | 3.| 500[nm] 93.1% | 4.| 565[nm] 88.5% | 5.| 635[nm] 9.7% | 6.| 760[nm] 100.0% | 7.| ------------------------------------------------------------ | 1. Date 2. Error message 3. Reflectivity of 430 nm wavelength 4. Reflectivity of 500 nm wavelength 5. Reflectivity of 565 nm wavelength 6. Reflectivity of 635 nm wavelength 7. Reflectivity of 760 nm wavelength 4.7.2. Detail Format (Service Mode) Print format and items

<Example> | --------+---------1---------+---------2-------- | | CHECK | | Serial No.12345678 | | 2005-04-12 14:10 | 1.| ======================== | | 430[nm] 93.1% | 2.| Pad 1 93.1% | 3.| Pad 2 93.1% | 3.| Pad 3 93.1% | 3.| Pad 4 93.1% | 3.| Pad 5 93.1% | 3.| Pad 6 93.1% | 3.| Pad 7 93.1% | 3.| Pad 8 93.1% | 3.| Pad 9 93.1% | 3.| Pad 10 93.1% | 3.| Pad 11 93.1% | 4.| White 93.1% | 5.| Base 93.1% | 6.| 500[nm] 93.1% | 2.| Pad 1 93.1% | 3.| Pad 2 93.1% | 3.| • | | • | | • | | ------------------------------------------------ | 1. Hardware serial number 2. Average reflectivity of pads at the various measurement wavelengths 3. Reflectivity of a specific pad (Reflectivity at a single wavelength using pad 11 as reference, 5 double-byte

characters) 4. A/D count of pad 11 (5 double-byte characters) 5. A/D count of white plate (5 double -byte characters) 6. A/D count of white space on check strip (5 double -byte characters)

Page 242: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AP1-11

4.8. S.G. Calibration Information (Service Mode) Print format and items

<Example> | --------+---------1---------+---------2-------- | | AX-4030 V01.00 | | Serial No.12345678 | | 2005-04-12 13:19 | 1.| ======================== | | S.G. CAL INFO | | 2005-04-12 17:25 | 2.| Standard low <1.000> | 3.| Standard high <1.040> | 4.| MEAS value low <0.000> | 5.| MEAS value high <0.000> | 6.| COEF A: <0.0000> | 7.| COEF B: < 0.0000> | 8.| ======================== | | TURB CAL INFO | | Level - <0.012> | 9.| Level + <0.100> | 10.| Standard level <1.000> | 11.| Standard scatter <0.000> | 12.| Coefficient data | | A/D : 11111 22222 33333 444444 | 13.| Coef : A = 12345 B = 67890 | 14.| Error : 0 | 15.| Status : 0 | 16.| ======================== | | Hb CAL INFO | | Threshold level <25> | 17.| Standard <25> | 18.| Standard TRANS <0.000> | 19.| ------------------------------------------------ | The S.G. calibration information report contains the following information. 1. Hardware serial number 2. S.G. calibration date and time 3. S.G. calibration low solution density 4. S.G. calibration high solution density 5. S.G. calibration low solution measurement result 6. S.G. calibration high solution measurement result 7. Correction coefficient A 8. Correction coefficient B 9. Turbidity – threshold 10. Turbidity + threshold 11. Turbidity standard solution level 12. Turbidity standard solution scatter intensity 13. Turbidity scatter correction A/S value 14. Turbidity scatter correction coefficients 15. Turbidity scatter correction error 16. Turbidity scatter correction status 17. Hb standard solution threshold 18. Hb standard solution density 19. Hb standard solution transparency

Page 243: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AP1-12

4.9. Detailed Parameter Settings (Service Mode) Print format and items

<Example> | --------+---------1---------+---------2-------- | | AX-4030 V01.00 | | Serial No.12345678 | | 2005-04-12 13:19 | 1.| ======================== | | S.G. detail | | S.G. request <0> | 2.| S.G. correct [ON ] | 3.| S.G. ABN low <0.995> | 4.| S.G. ABN high <1.055> | 5.| ======================== | | Strip detail | | TEMP correct [ON ] | 6.| Over reflex <120> | 7.| Abnormal color [ON ] | 8.| ======================== | | Result detail | | Print TEMP [ON ] | 9.| Print add wash mark[OFF] | 10.| Rank mark [+4 ] | 11.| Abnormal mark [All ] | 12.| S.G. limit mark [OFF] | 13.| Drop miss [Data ] | 14.| Data type [Normal] | 15. | Check result [Normal] | 16. | S.G. ABN mark <0> | 17. | TURB ABN mark <0> | 18. | ======================== | | Simulation | | A/D aux mode [Mode 0] | 19. | Sample check [ON ] | 20. | Strip check [ON ] | 21. | Washing SOL check [ON ] | 22. | Sampler simulation [OFF] | 23. | Sampling TRBL check[ON ] | 24. | Add wash check [ON ] | 25. | SG,TB,Hb TRBL check[ON ] | 26. | Strip type check [ON ] | 27. | Drop miss check [ON ] | 28. | Slant TRBL check [ON ] | 29. | ------------------------------------------------ |

Page 244: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AP1-13

The detailed parameter settings list contains the following information. 1. Hardware serial number 2. S.G. calibration measurement interval setting 3. S.G. correction on/off setting 4. S.G. abnormal low threshold setting 5. S.G. abnormal high threshold setting 6. Reflectivity temperature correction on/off setting 7. Over reflex threshold setting 8. Abnormal color detection on/off setting 9. Temperature printing on/off setting 10. Additional washout marks printing on/off setting 11. Rank mark format setting 12. Abnormal mark type setting (for printing) 13. S.G. limit mark printing on/off setting 14. Staining miss handling method setting 15. Normal measurement results output format setting 16. Check measurement result output format setting 17. S.G. abnormal mark output condition setting 18. Turbidity abnormal mark output condition setting 19. A/D external output mode setting 20. Sample detection on/off setting 21. Test strip detection on/off setting 22. Washing solution detection on/off setting 23. Sampler simulation on/off setting 24. Sampling trouble check on/off setting 25. Additional washout on/off setting 26. S.G., turbidity and tintometer trouble check on/off setting 27. Test strip type identification on/off setting 28. Staining miss check on/off setting 29. Test strip skewing check on/off setting

Page 245: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AP1-14

4.10. Test Strip Information (Service Mode) Print format and items <Example> | --------+---------1---------+---------2-------- | | AX-4030 V01.00 | | Serial No.12345678 | | 2005-04-12 13:19 | 1. | ======================== | | Strip INFO | | Strip No. 9 [10PA] | 2. | Pad| Item |No.|Prn|Aux | | 1| GLU | 1| 1| 1 | 3. | 2| PRO | 2| 2| 2 | 3. | 3| URO | 5| 3| 3 | 3. | 4| BIL | 4| 4| 4 | 3. | 5| CRE | 10| 5| 5 | 3. | 6| PH | 7| 6| 6 | 3. | 7| BLD | 8| 7| 7 | 3. | 8| KET | 3| 8| 8 | 3. | 9| NIT | 6| 9| 9 | 3. | 10| LEU | 9| 10| 10 | 3. | 11| REF | 0| 0| 0 | 3. | 12| P/C | 11| 11| 11 | 3. | --| S.G. | --| 13|FIX | 3. | --| Color | --| 14|FIX | 3. | --| TURB | --| 12| 12 | 3. | ------------------------------------------------ | 1. Hardware serial number 2. Test strip number, test strip type 3. Test strip information table headers

Pad: Pad position Item: Item name No.: Item number Prn: Printer queue Aux: External output queue

Page 246: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AP1-15

4.11. Reagent Items Information (Service Mode) Print format and items <Example> | --------+---------1---------+---------2-------- | | AX-4030 V01.00 | | Serial No.12345678 | | 2005-04-12 13:19 | 1. | ======================== | | Strip item INFO | | Item No. 1 | 2. | Name [GLU ] | 3. | Unit [ mg/dl] | 4. | MEAS wave [635nm] | 5. | Reference wave [760nm] | 6. | Abnormal mark rank < 4> | 7. | Drop volume <188> | 8. | Pre-wait time <100> | 9. | Post-wait time <350> | 10. | ABN color REF < 0.0>% | 11. | INIT CAL A <1.000> | 12. | INIT CAL B < 0.0>% | 13. | Temperature correction | | PAR-A < -30> | 14. | PAR-B < 2> | 15. | PAR-C < 92> | 16. | PAR-D < 1> | 17. | PAR-E value < -337> | 18. | PAR-E EXP < -4> | 19. | PAR-F value < 468> | 20. | PAR-F EXP < -3> | 21. | REF lower limit < 0> | 22. | REF upper limit < 92> | 23. | TEMP lower limit < 12> | 24. | TEMP upper limit < 32> | 25. | Wavelength calibration | | | REF % | K % | | 1| 10.0 | 0.0 | 26. | 2| 20.0 | 0.0 | | 3| 30.0 | 0.0 | | 4| 40.0 | 0.0 | | 5| 50.0 | 0.0 | | 6| 60.0 | 0.0 | | 7| 70.0 | 0.0 | | 8| 80.0 | 0.0 | | 9| 90.0 | 0.0 | | 10| 100.0 | 0.0 | | Calibration curve | | | Rank CONC |REF %|SG | | 1|NORMAL | 82.0|00 | 27. | 2|+- 30| 75.0|01 | | 3|+- 50| 65.0|02 | | 4|+1 70| 57.0|03 | | 5|+1 100| 49.0|04 | | 6|+2 150| 43.0|06 | | 7|+2 200| 36.0|08 | | 8|+3 300| 28.0|12 | | 9|+3 500| 20.0|20 | | 10|+4 1000| 16.5|40 | | 11|+4 OVER| 0.0|40 | | 12| | 0.0|00 | | 13| | 0.0|00 | | 14| | 0.0|00 | | 15| | 0.0|00 | | 16| | 0.0|00 | | ------------------------------------------------ |

Page 247: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AP1-16

The reagent items information list contains the following information. 1. Hardware serial number 2. Item number 3. Item name 4. Item units 5. Measurement wavelength 6. Reference wavelength 7. Abnormal mark indication rank 8. Staining volume 9. Wait time prior to staining 10. Wait time after staining 11. Positive evaluation threshold 12. Reflectivity correction A 13. Reflectivity correction B 14. Temperature correction parameter A 15. Temperature correction parameter B 16. Temperature correction parameter C 17. Temperature correction parameter D 18. Temperature correction parameter E (Mantissa) 19. Temperature correction parameter E (Exponent) 20. Temperature correction parameter F (Mantissa) 21. Temperature correction parameter F (Exponent) 22. Correction lower limit reflectivity 23. Correction upper limit reflectivity 24. Correction lower limit temperature 25. Correction upper limit temperature 26. Wavelength calibration parameters

REF% (Correction reflectivity), K% (Correction coefficient) The wavelength calibration parameter shows 10 calibration points.

27. Calibration curve table items Rank (Rank), CONC (Concentration), REF (Reflectivity threshold) S.G. (specific gravity correction) shows only 2 of 5 places below the decimal.

Page 248: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AP1-17

4.12. Color Tone Settings (Service Mode) Print format and items <Example> | --------+---------1---------+---------2-------- | | AX-4030 V01.00 | | Serial No.12345678 | | 2005-04-12 13:19 | 1. | ======================== | | Color information | | [Yellow] | 2. | 0080.73<0113.31 | | 0000.37<0001.00<0003.21 | | [Orange] | 3. | 0061.63<0080.73 | | 0007.75<0031.04<0063.56 | | [Green] | 4. | 0113.31<0163.50 | | 0003.56<0010.84<0029.51 | | [Blue] | 5. | 0163.50<0258.49 | | 0009.07<0046.01<0105.59 | | [Violet] | 6. | 0258.49<0344.90 | | 0003.21<0012.05<0028.57 | | [Red] | 7. | 0344.90<0017.68 | | 0012.08<0043.84<0118.30 | | [Brown] | 8. | 0017.68<0061.63 | | 0004.07<0018.48<0043.46 | | ------------------------------------------------ |

The color tone settings list contains the following information. 1. Hardware serial number 2. Yellow evaluation reference 3. Orange evaluation reference 4. Green evaluation reference 5. Blue evaluation reference 6. Violet evaluation reference 7. Red evaluation reference 8. Brown evaluation reference

Page 249: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AP1-18

4.13. Pulse Settings (Service Mode) Print format and items <Example> | --------+---------1---------+---------2-------- | | AX-4030 V01.00 | | Serial No.12345678 | | 2005-04-12 13:19 | 1. | ======================== | | Machine INFO | | Feeder | | Initialize 111 < +10> | 2. | Introduction | | Feeder POS 2714 < +40> | 3. | Pas POS 400 < -57> | 4. | Drop POS 2049 < -42> | 5. | Pad sens 156 < -156> | 6. | Marker offset < -7> | 7. | Nozzle | | Rack FB 2375 < +15> | 8. | Rack UD 1525 < +30> | 9. | Stat FB 2875 < +15> | 10. | Stat UD 1525 < +30> | 11. | Wash FB 1794 < +15> | 12. | Wash UD 716 < +20> | 13. | Drop FB 250 < +20> | 14. | Drop UD S 686 < +16> | 15. | Drop UD E 686 < +15> | 16. | Optical system | | Start 3235 < +23> | 17. | Sampler | | MEAS 1ST 260 < +7> | 18. | Carry send 2725 < +0> | 19. | Carry lower 3635 < +0> | 20. | REF A/D digital VR | | 430nm < 70>< 80>< 96> | 21. | 500nm < 38>< 39>< 36> | 22. | 565nm <110><110><100> | 23. | 635nm < 97>< 82><152> | 24. | 760nm < 48>< 58>< 54> | 25. | 945nm < 92><---><---> | 26. | Flow A/D digital VR | | LED red <141> | 27. | LED green < 91> | 28. | LED blue < 51> | 29. | SCAT gain red1 < 0> | 30. | SCAT gain red2 <206> | 31. | SCAT gain green1< 0> | 32. | SCAT gain green2<202> | 33. | SCAT gain blue1 < 0> | 34. | SCAT gain blue2 <164> | 35. | Feeder digital VR | | Strip ON/OFF (L) <205> | 36. | Strip ON/OFF (R) <189> | 37. | Strip F/B(L) <213> | 38. | Strip F/B(R) <175> | 39. | Pad scan digital VR | | Pad detect <120> | 40. | Marker detect <216> | 41. | Hand speed <143> | 42.

Page 250: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AP1-19

The teaching pulse settings list contains the following information. 1. Hardware serial number 2. Number of feeder drum pulses to initial position 3. Number of introduction arm pulses to feeder position (test strip picking position) 4. Number of introduction arm pulses to pad detection position 5. Number of introduction arm pulses to staining position 6. Distance between pad detection sensor and marker sensor 7. Number of marker width detection pulses 8. Number of nozzle front-back pulses at rack position 9. Number of nozzle up-down pulses at rack position 10. Number of nozzle front-back pulses at STAT position 11. Number of nozzle up-down pulses at STAT position 12. Number of nozzle front-back pulses at washing bath position 13. Number of nozzle up-down pulses at washing bath position 14. Number of nozzle front-back pulses at staining start position 15. Number of nozzle up-down pulses at staining start position 16. Number of nozzle up-down pulses at staining end position 17. Number of optical system pulses at scan start position 18. Number of sampler measuring lever pulses to rack feed start position 19. Number of sampler return lever feed pulses for rack downstream feeding for a bridge connected sampler 20. Number of sampler return lever feed pulses for rack feeding to downstream when bridge is connected 21. Optical system, 430 nm LED: Electronic volume value for intensity adjustment

(There are 3 LEDs and 3 separate settings.) 22. Optical system, 500 nm LED: Electronic volume value for intensity adjustment

(There are 3 LEDs and 3 separate settings.) 23. Optical system, 565 nm LED: Electronic volume value for intensity adjustment

(There are 3 LEDs and 3 separate settings.) 24. Optical system, 635 nm LED: Electronic volume value for intensity adjustment

(There are 3 LEDs and 3 separate settings.) 25. Optical system, 760 nm LED: Electronic volume value for intensity adjustment

(There are 3 LEDs and 3 separate settings.) 26. Optical system 945 nm LED: Electronic volume value for intensity adjustment 27. Flow optical system (color tone), red transparent LED: Electronic volume value for intensity adjustment 28. Flow optical system (color tone), green transparent LED: Electronic volume value for intensity adjustment 29. Flow optical system (color tone), blue transparent LED: Electronic volume value for intensity adjustment 30. Flow optical system (turbidity), red scattered light gain amp 1: Electronic volume value 31. Flow optical system (turbidity), red scattered light gain amp 2: Electronic volume value 32. Flow optical system (turbidity), green scattered light gain amp 1: Electronic volume value 33. Flow optical system (turbidity), green scattered light gain amp 2: Electronic volume value 34. Flow optical system (turbidity), blue scattered light gain amp 1: Electronic volume value 35. Flow optical system (turbidity), blue scattered light gain amp 2: Electronic volume value 36. Feeder left-side test strip detection sensor: Electronic volume value for sensitivity adjustment 37. Feeder right-side test strip detection sensor: Electronic volume value for sensitivity adjustment 38. Feeder left-side test strip top-bottom detection sensor: Electronic volume value for sensitivity adjustment 39. Feeder right-side test strip top-bottom detection sensor: Electronic volume value for sensitivity adjustment 40. Pad detection sensor: Electronic volume value for sensitivity adjustment 41. Marker detection sensor: Electronic volume value for sensitivity adjustment 42. Test strip transport section: Electronic volume value for transport speed adjustment

Page 251: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AP1-20

4.14. User Setup (Service Mode) Print format and items <Example> | --------+---------1---------+---------2-------- | | AX-4030 V01.00 | | Serial No.12345678 | | 2005-04-12 13:19 | 1. | ======================== | | Printer setting | | Use/Non use | | [ ] | | Copy quantity <1> | 2. | Line feed <5> | 3. | Data line feed <0> | 4. | Data type [YMD] | 5. | Normal data [ON ] | 6. | Control data [ON ] | 7. | Stat data [ON ] | 8. | ======================== | | Com setting | | Use/Non use | | [ ] | | Format [AX-4030 ] | 9. | Speed [ 9600] | 10. | Way [Simplex] | 11. | Normal data [ON ] | 12. | Control data [ON ] | 13. | Stat data [ON ] | 14. | Normal online [ON ] | 15. | Stat online [OFF] | 16. | Data time out < 20> | 17. | Online time out 1 < 40> | 18. | Online time out 2 <200> | 19. | ID response <1800> | 20. | ======================== | | Buzzer volume setting | | Volume [ ] | | ======================== | | Barcode | | Use [OFF] | 21. | Start digit < 1> | 22. | Read digit <13> | 23. | Miss read [Pass] | 24. | ======================== | | Sampler | | Rack feed [One-way ] | 25. | ======================== | | Rack ID | | #00 [Normal ] | 26. | #01 [Item ] | | #02 [Item ] | | #03 [Item ] | | #04 [Item ] | | #05 [Item ] | | #06 [Item ] | | #07 [Item ] | | #08 [Item ] | | #09 [Item ] | | #10 [Item ] | | #11 [Pass ] | | #12 [Start ] | | #13 [Pass ] | | #14 [Pass ] | | #15 [Pass ] | | #16 [Pass ] | | #17 [Pass ] | | #18 [Pass ] | | #19 [Pass ] | | #20 [Pass ] | | #21 [Pass ] | | #22 [Pass ] | | #23 [Pass ] |

Page 252: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AP1-21

| #24 [Pass ] | | #25 [Pass ] | | #26 [Pass ] | | #27 [Pass ] | | #28 [START/CTRL ] | | #29 [Pass ] | | #30 [Pass ] | | #31 [None ] | | ======================== | | Option | | Ethernet [OFF] | 27. | Language [Japanese] | 28. | ======================== | | Strip setting | | Strip(1) [8UA ] | | Strip(2) [9UB ] | | Main feeder [1] | | ======================== | | Setting item rack | | Strip | | #01 [ 8UA (1)] | | #02 [ 8UA (1)] | | #03 [ 8UA (1)] | | #04 [ 8UA (1)] | | #05 [ 8UA (1)] | | #06 [ 8UA (1)] | | #07 [ 8UA (1)] | | #08 [ 8UA (1)] | | #09 [ 8UA (1)] | | #10 [ 8UA (1)] | | ======================== | | Display format of result | | Sample | | [ ] | | Control | | [ ] | | JCCLS [OFF] | 29. | ======================== | | Measure No.setting | | Start No. | | [ ] | | Measure No. | | [ ] | | Use [OFF] | 30. | Start digit < 1> | 31. | Read digit <13> | 32. | Low <------------------> | 33. | Mid <------------------> | 34. | High<------------------> | 35. | ------------------------------------------------ |

Page 253: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

AP1-22

The service mode user settings list contains the following information. Settings that are the same in the user mode are omitted. 1. Hardware serial number 2. Number of print copies setting 3. Number of print line feeds setting 4. Number of measurement results line feeds setting 5. Date display format setting 6. Normal measurement results printing on/off setting 7. Control measurement results printing on/off setting 8. STAT measurement results printing on/off setting 9. Communication format setting 10. Communication speed setting 11. Communication protocol setting 12. Normal measurement results transmission on/off setting 13. Control measurement results transmission on/off setting 14. STAT measurement results transmission on/off setting 15. Normal measurement results inquiry on/off setting 16. STAT measurement results inquiry on/off setting 17. Text block time interval setting for simplex (data output) communications 18. Response from terminal wait time setting 19. Text block response from terminal wait time setting 20. Support response from terminal wait time setting 21. Built-in barcode reader on/off setting 22. Barcode reading start digit setting 23. Number of barcode digits to read setting 24. Operation after misreading barcode setting 25. Sampler operation (rack feeding) mode setting 26. Rack ID type setting 27. Ethernet enable/disable setting 28. Language setting 29. JCCLS printing on/off setting 30. Control ID on/off setting 31. Control ID barcode reading start digit setting 32. Number of control ID barcode digits to read setting 33. Control low ID setting 34. Control middle ID setting 35. Control high ID setting

Page 254: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix AX-4030 Service Manual

Page 255: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix AX-4030 Service Manual

Appendix 2

Specification of the output data

Page 256: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-1

Appendix 2 Specification of the output data (Data Format) 1. Outline

This provides explanation on the specifications of the external output of the instrument AX-4030, which has a communication format AX-4030 standard format compliant to ASTM-1394, a new ARKRAY standard communication format for output to external device. Here the details of AX-4030 standard format will be discussed.

2. Types of data format specifications This instrument can output data to an external device in a new output format and in a format compatible

to convenient AX-4280, SA-4250, SA-4230, and SA-4220. Select the format in Service Mode. The communication formats are listed below. The instrument has a normal output port to connect to the host and a special port to connect to IQ.

No Output mode format Normal port IQ connection

port Communication

standard 1 AX-4030 standard format bidirectional × ASTM-1394 2 AX-4280 compatible format bidirectional/unidirectional unidirectional Compliant to Class B3 SA-4250 compatible format bidirectional/unidirectional unidirectional Compliant to Class B4 SA-4230 compatible format bidirectional/unidirectional unidirectional Compliant to Class B5 SA-4220 compatible (8A) format bidirectional/unidirectional unidirectional Compliant to Class B6 SA-4220 compatible (8B) format bidirectional/unidirectional unidirectional Compliant to Class B

AX-4030 standard format allows selection from concentration and reflectivity for normal sample and for

control solution measurement results separately. 3. Hardware

3.1. External output method RS-232C compatible, bit serial output

3.2. Connector

Type: DB-9, 9-pin (JIS X5103)

Pin No. Signal Note 2 RXD 3 TXD 5 GND

Page 257: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-2

3.3. Connector locations

Connect to normal port

<Caution!> This port is the special port for connection with IQ. As the connector has the same configuration as normal port, be careful not to make a wrong connection.

Normal port

Rear side of the instrument

Page 258: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-3

4. Communication specifications

4.1.Transfer method Asynchronous communication method

4.2. Transfer rate

Transfer rate for normal port can be set to 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200 bps. Default setting is 2400 bps.

4.3. Data format

When AX-4030 standard format is selected for normal output port, data will consist of 1 character, 10 bit configuration.

- start bit: 1bit - data bit: 8bit (ASCII code) - parity bit: none - stop bit: 1bit

4.4. Flow control None

4.5. Output timing

Data are output after one sample measurement is completed or when a manual re-output command is made.

Page 259: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-4

5. AX-4030 standard format

5.1. Communication frame configuration

STX FN communication

(transmission) data

(max. 240 byte)

ETB

or

ETX

CSH CSL CR LF

5.2. Maximum frame length Maximum frame length will be 247 byte including STX, ETB or ETX, checksum, CR, and LF. Maximum

communication data length is 240 byte (247-7). If communication data length is longer than 240 byte, the

data will be divided into several frames for transmission.

5.3. Frame code Code Hexadecimal Contents

STX 02H Start of text (frame)

FN 30H~37H

‘0’~’7’

Frame number

Starts from 1 and is incremented by 1. Restarts from 0

after 7.

transmission data Communication text

5.4. Communication data configuration

5.5. See record format

ETB 17H End of transmission block ETB

or ETX ETX 03H End of text (frame)

CSH Checksum higher digit

CSL Note 1)

Checksum lower digit

CR 0DH Carriage return

LF 0AH Line feed

Page 260: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-5

<Communication example> In this example, checksum is given proper values A, B, C, or D. See note 1) for the computation method of checksum below. “<ACK>” in shade is a reply from the host. Communication process will be explained in later chapters. <ENQ> <ACK> <STX>1H|$^&|||AX-4030^12345678^DEBUG |||||||||300001200109<CR><ETB>D5<CR><LF><ACK> <STX>2P|1<CR><ETB>53<CR><LF><ACK> <STX>3O|1|------------------^000-01|0001|^^^GLU $^^^PRO $^^^URO $^^^BIL $^^^CRE $ ^^^PH $^^^BLD $^^^KET $^^^NIT $^^^LEU $^^^P/C $^^^TURB$^^^S.G.$^^^COLOR|R||||||| |||S|||10PA ^00|^*<CR><ETB>82<CR><LF><ACK> <STX>4R|1|^^^GLU |^OVER|mg/dL ||*||F|||200604031210<CR><ETB>81<CR><LF><ACK> <STX>5R|2|^^^PRO |^OVER|mg/dL ||*||F|||200604031210<CR><ETB>8C<CR><LF><ACK> <STX>6R|3|^^^URO |4+ ^|||*||F|||200604031210<CR><ETB>63<CR><LF><ACK> <STX>7R|4|^^^BIL |4+ ^|||*||F|||200604031210<CR><ETB>46<CR><LF><ACK> <STX>0R|5|^^^CRE |^10|mg/dL ||||F|||200604031210<CR><ETB>6E<CR><LF><ACK> <STX>1R|6|^^^PH |^9.0|||||F|||200604031210<CR><ETB>B1<CR><LF><ACK> <STX>2R|7|^^^BLD |2+ ^|||*||F|||200604031210<CR><ETB>3D<CR><LF><ACK> <STX>3R|8|^^^KET |4+ ^|||*||F|||200604031210<CR><ETB>53<CR><LF><ACK> <STX>4R|9|^^^NIT |2+ ^|||*||F|||200604031210<CR><ETB>5A<CR><LF><ACK> <STX>5R|10|^^^LEU |^500|Leu/uL ||*||F|||200604031210<CR><ETB>6C<CR><LF><ACK> <STX>6R|11|^^^P/C |2+ ^|||*||F|||200604031210<CR><ETB>5C<CR><LF><ACK> <STX>7R|12|^^^TURB|- ^|||||F|||200604031210<CR><ETB>FF<CR><LF><ACK> <STX>0R|13|^^^S.G.|^1.000|||||F|||200604031210<CR><ETB>54<CR><LF><ACK> <STX>1R|14|^^^COLOR|^COLORLESS |||||F|||200604031210<CR><ETB>06<CR><LF><ACK> <STX>2L|1|N<CR><ETX>05<CR><LF><ACK> <EOT>

Note 1) Computation of checksum

Checksum starts addition just after STX and ends at ETX (or ETB), divides the sum by 256 (100H)

and expresses the remainder of the division in 2-digit hexadecimal, of which the first digit is CSH

and the second digit is CSL.

[Example] When the sum from the next to STX to ETX is 2005 (7D5H):

2005(7D5H) mod 256(100H) = 213(D5H)

Here CSH is ‘D’ (44H) and CSL is ‘5’ (35H). <STX>1H|$^&|||AX-4030^12345678^DEBUG |||||||||300001200109<CR><ETB>D5<CR><LF>

Page 261: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-6

5.4. Communication data structure Sent and received data consist of plural records in the following hierarchy.

Each record consists of several fields. Content of a record is defined by record types. The number of

fields in a record is fixed for each record type. Data length within a field is flexible (minimum is 0 for

default value). Each field is segmented by field delimiter. For fields to be omitted, delimiter is not

removed but left to indicate that the field has been omitted there. But the delimiter at the end of a record

can be omitted.

(Note 1) Result report is added for each measurement parameter. Therefore one measurement result will have several result records. Number of result records differs for each test strips.

(1) Query data (instrument to host) Note) Setting is made to have order request to the host. Message header record HRequest information record Q

Message end record L (2) Response data (host to instrument) Note) Setting is made to have order request to the host.

Message header record HPatient information record P

Test order record 1 OMessage end record L

(3) Measurement result data (instrument to host)

Message header record HPatient information record P

Test order record 2 OResult record 1 (note 1) R

Result record 2 RResult record 3 R

: :

Message end record L

Page 262: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-7

5.5. Record format Explanation is not given for fields defined by ASTM-1394 but unused in the present specifications. Field

numbers not found in the list are unused fields. 5.5.1. AX-4030 (1) Message header record (instrument to and from host)

Message header record consists of 14 fields in total. No. Field Explanation/example Note 1 Record type Fixed character “H” 2 Delimiter setting Fixed character

- Field delimiter - Repeat delimiter - Component delimiter - Escape delimiter

“|$^&” 3 Control ID 1. Address of a message. One of below: 1.-1) External HOST terminal: NULL (no output)

1.-2) Remote maintenance: “R”

5 Sender 1. instrument name 2. instrument serial number (S/N) 3. version of the instrument

Example of output: “AX-4030^10900001^V01.00 ” 14 Communication

time and date Communication time and date (YYYYMMDDHHMM)

Example of output: “200203111010”, etc. End of a record End of a record. Fixed code. <CR>(0x0D)

<Example> H|$^&|||AX-4030^10900001^V01.00 |||||||||200203111010<CR>

(2) Patient information record (instrument to and from host)

Patient information record consists of 2 fields. No. Field Explanation/example Note 1 Record type Fixed character “P”

2 Sequence number Fixed number character “1” End of a record End of a record. Fixed code. <CR>(0x0D)

<Example> P|1<CR>

Page 263: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-8

(3) Request information record (instrument to host) Note) Setting is made to have order request to the host.

A test order record consists of 13 fields. No. Field Explanation/example Note 1 Record type Fixed character (“Q”) “Q”

2 Sequence number Fixed number character “1” 3 Patient ID 1. Barcode data

2. Port number (rack number-hole number)

Output sample: “123456789012345678^001-01”, etc. 13 Query code Fixed character (“O”: order request): “O” End of a record End of a record Fixed to “<CR>(0x0D)”

<Example>Q|1|45645645645645 ^001-01||||||||||O<CR>

(4) Test order record 1 (host to instrument) Note) Setting is made to have order request to the

host.

A test order record consists of 6 fields. No. Field Explanation/example Note 1 Record type Fixed character (“O”) “O”

2 Sequence number Fixed number character “1” 3 Patient ID 1. Barcode data

2. Port number (rack number-hole number)

Output sample: “123456789012345678^001-01” etc. 5 Measurement

parameters 1. -1) With measurement: one of below

Measurement parameter name (consists of 4

components but the first 3 are not used). Output will

follow the applicable measurement parameters from

below ones.

1. -2) Without measurement: NULL (no output)

“^^^NO1”or“^^^NO2”

6 Priority Fixed number character

“S”

End of a record End of a record Fixed to “<CR>(0x0D)”

<Example> (With measurement) O|1|45645645645645 |||S<CR> (Without measurement) O|1|78978978978978 ||^^^NO1|S<CR>

Page 264: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-9

(5) Test order record 2 (instrument to host)

Test order record consists of 20 fields. No. Field Explanation/example Note 1 Record type Fixed character (“O”) “O”

2 Sequence number Fixed number character “1” 3 Patient ID 1. Barcode data

(Note: in case of unsuccessful barcode reading, “-” in the number of significant figures replace.

2. Port number (rack number-hole number) (Note: In case of manual STAT, it is set to NULL (no

output))

Output sample: “123456789012345678^001-01”, etc. Output sample: “------------------^001-01”, etc.

4 Measurement number

1. Measurement number: “0001”, etc.

5 Measurement parameters

Measurement parameters name (consists of 4 components but the first 3 are not used). Parameter name will be output as arbitrary ASCII character string. Example of parameters: “^^^GLU ”“^^^PRO ”“^^^BIL ”“^^^URO ” “^^^PH ”“^^^BLD ”“^^^KET ”“^^^NIT ” “^^^LEU ”“^^^TURB”“^^^S.G.”“^^^COLOR” “^^^ALB ”(*1)“^^^LPR ”(*1)“^^^CRE ”(*1)

“^^^A/C ”(*1)“^^^P/C ”(*1)

Output sample: “^^^LEU $^^^TURB$^^^S.G.”, etc.

6 Priority 1. Type of measurement. One of below.

1. -1) Manual STAT: “M”

1. -2) STAT: “S”

1. -3) Routine: “R”

16 Sample type 1. Sample type. One of below.

1. -1) Normal sample: “S”

1. -2) Control L: “CNT^L”

1. -3) Control M: “CNT^M”

1. -4) Control H: “CNT^H”

Page 265: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-10

19 Measurement

information 1. Test strip’s parameters are output as arbitrary ASCII character string.

2. Temperature (°C). One of below.

1. “10PA ”(*1)“10EA ”“9EA ”

“8EA ”“7EA ”“6EA ”“5EA ”

“4EA ”“9UB ”“8UA ”“8UB ”

“7UA ”“7UB ”“5UA ”“5UB ”

“4UA ”

2. -1) When set to “no temperature correction”: NULL

(no output)

2. -2) When set to “no temperature printing”: NULL

(no output)

2. -3) Other than above: number characters “XX”

Output sample: “10EA ^27”

20 Measurement error 1. Details of measurement error. One of below.

2. Sample abnormal value mark. One of below:

(*1)

1. -1) In case of error: “DRIFT ”, etc. 1. -2) No error: NULL (no output) 2. -1) Normal: NULL (no output) 2. -2) Abnormality in a parameter: “*” 2. -3) Abnormality in measurement: “?” Output sample: “DRIFT ^?”, etc.

End of a record End of a record Fixed to “<CR>(0x0D)”

(*1): new parameters (creatinine/microalbumin)

<Example> O|1|------------------^000-04|0004|^^^GLU $^^^PRO $^^^URO $^^^BIL $^^^CRE $ ^^^PH $^^^BLD $^^^KET $^^^NIT $^^^LEU $^^^P/C $^^^TURB$^^^S.G.$^^^COLOR|R| |||||||||S|||10PA ^00|DRIFT ^?<CR> (※1) Measurement error

Error details are as following. Details of measurement error Meaning Data Normal YES NO SAMPLE Sample volume shortage NO DRIFT DARK light volume fluctuation NO DROP MISS Sample application error YES REFLEX OVER Reflection rate is abnormally high YES STRIP DEVIATE Test strip is misaligned vertically. NO

Page 266: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-11

(6) Record of the result (instrument to host) Record of the result consists of 12 fields. No. Field Explanation/example Note 1 Record type Fixed character “R”

2 Sequence number Sequence number starting from 1 Output sample: “1” “2” “3”, etc. 3 Measurement

parameters

Measurement parameters name (consists of 4 components but the first three are not used). Parameter name is output as arbitrary ASCII character string.

Example of parameter name “^^^GLU ”“^^^PRO ”“^^^BIL ”“^^^URO ” “^^^PH ”“^^^BLD ”“^^^KET ”“^^^NIT ” “^^^LEU ”“^^^TURB”“^^^S.G.”“^^^COLOR” “^^^ALB ”(*1)“^^^LPR ”(*1)“^^^CRE ”(*1) “^^^A/C ”(*1)“^^^P/C ”(*1) Output sample: “^^^LEU ”, etc.

Page 267: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-12

4 measurement

value

1. Semi-quantitative symbol of measurement result. Output as arbitrary ASCII character string.

2. Concentration value or reflection rate. Output as arbitrary ASCII character string except for following measurement parameters: 2. -1) “TURB” indicates turbidity. 2. -2) “S.G.” indicates specific gravity. 2. -3) “COLOR” indicates hue.

Output as ‘1. +“^”+2’.

1. Semi-quantitative symbols “NORMAL”, “+- “, “- “, “+1 ”, “+2 “, “+3 “, “+4 “, “NEG. ”, “1+ “, “2+ “, “3+ “, “4+ ”, “++ “, “+++ “, “++++ “, “DILUTE”, etc. Without semi-quantitative symbols, NULL (no

output) will be given. 2. Concentration value (X: number character)

“X.XX” “X.X” “X” “XX” “XXX” “XXXX” “OVER”

Reflectivity (X: number character) “X.X” “XX.X” “XXX.X” 2. -1) Turbidity “- ” “+1” “1+” “+ ” “+2” “2+” “++” etc.

At a measurement error, error details are given. 2. -2) Specific gravity (X: number) “X.X” “X.XX” “X.XXX” At a measurement error, error details are given. 2. -3) Hue “COLORLESS ”“DARK BLUE ”“LIGHT YELLOW” “LIGHT VIOLET”“YELLOW ”“VIOLET ” “DARK YELLOW ”“DARK VIOLET ”“LIGHT ORANGE” “LIGHT RED ”“ORANGE ”“RED ” “DARK ORANGE ”“DARK RED ”“LIGHT GREEN ” “LIGHT BROWN ”“GREEN ”“BROWN ” “DARK GREEN ”“DARK BROWN ”“LIGHT BLUE ” “OTHER ”“BLUE ” Output sample:+2 ^150

5 Unit 1. Unit symbols. Output as arbitrary ASCII character string. 1. -1) Unit symbols: “mg/dL”, “mg/dl” “mmol/L”, “%”, etc. 1. -2) Without unit symbols, NULL (no output) is given.

Page 268: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-13

7 Abnormal flag 1. Abnormal flag. The abnormality for each

parameter is given below. 1. -1) For “TURB”, one of below. Normal: NULL (no output); abnormal measurement: “*”. 1. -2) For “S.G.”, one of below. Normal: NULL (no output); limit of correction: “*”. 1. -3) For ”COLOR”: NULL (no output) 1. -4) For other parameters, one of below. Normal: NULL (no output); abnormal: “*”; or Abnormal coloration: “!”.

9 Inspection result conditions

Inspection result conditions code In this specification, fixed character for “final result” is given: “F”

12 Measurement start time and date

Time and date when the measurement is started. (YYYYMMDDHHMM) Output sample: “200203111010”, etc.

End of a record

End of a record. Fixed code. <CR>(0x0D)

(*1): new parameters (creatinine/microalbumin)

<Example> R|1|^^^GLU |^30|mg/dL ||||F|||200604031238<CR>

R|14|^^^COLOR|^COLORLESS |||||F|||200604031238<CR>

(7) Message end record (instrument to and from host)

Message end record consists of 3 fields. No. Field Explanation/example Note 1 Record type Fixed character “L”

2 Sequence number Fixed number character “1”

3 End code Indicates whether the transmission ended normally. In this specification, ”normal ending” is expressed with a fixed character:

”N” End of a record End of a record. Fixed code. <CR>(0x0D)

<Example> L|1|N<CR>

Page 269: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-14

6. Bidirectional communication This instrument has two types of bidirectional communication protocol, AX-4030 protocol and AX-

4280 protocol.

Both have basically the same protocol configuration, but detect an error in different methods. This

booklet describes AX-4030 protocol.

6.1 Communication setting

Parameter name AX-4030 protocol

Interface Bit serial voltage (RS-232C

compatible)

Default transfer rate 9600 bps

Data bit length 8bit

Parity None

Stop bit 1 bit

Code ASCII code

Maximum length of 1

block

247 byte including control codes

6.2 RS-232C communication protocol

6.2.1 Communication control code

Code Hexadecimal Content

ENQ 05H Query (Request for communication start)

ACK 06H Acknowledgment

NAK 15H Negative acknowledgment

EOT 04H Request for end of transmission and suspension of

receiving

Page 270: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-15

6.2.2 Communication content

(1) Communication procedure <Query about barcode>

2. Compare the information with registered barcodes and reply with one obelow orders to AX-4030:

f

NO1 (Measurement of test strip 1) NO2 (Measurement of test strip 2) NULL (no measurement)

1. Transmit the read barcode’s information

host

AX-4030

<Transmit the measurement result>

3. Transmit the measurement result

(2) Query

5. EOT

4. ACK or NAK

3. STX [barcode] ETX

2. ACK or NAK

1. ENQ

host

AX-4030

- Query timing

(1) When AX-4030 barcode reader reads a barcode, the instrument makes a query to the

host about the read barcode.

(2) The instrument waits for response (barcode and order for measurement) from the

host at sample application position.

When the instrument receives a response at once, there will be no waiting.

Page 271: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-16

(3) Response

5. EOT

4. ACK or NAK

3. STX [barcode][order] ETX

2. ACK or NAK

1. ENQ

host

AX-4030

Host compares the read barcode with registered barcodes and returns a measurement order

based on this comparison.

(4) Transmission of measurement result

5. STX [Nth block] ETX

6. ACK or NAK

7. EOT

4. ACK or NAK

3. STX [first block] ETB

2. ACK or NAK

1. ENQ

host

AX-4030

Page 272: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-17

6.2.3 Establishment phase

(1) Instrument transmits <ENQ>.

1. <ACK is received>

・ Instrument sends <ENQ> when it has a message to send.

・ After sending <ENQ>, if the instrument receives a response other than <ACK> or <ENQ>, the

instrument reacts in the same way as when it receives <NAK>.

・ After sending <ENQ>, if the instrument receives <ACK>, the instrument shifts to transmission

phase.

2. <NAK is received>

instrument

<ENQ>

<ACK> To transmission phase (frame transmission)

PC

・ After sending <ENQ>, if the instrument receives <NAK>, it resends <ENQ> after 10-second

standby.

・ If the instrument does not receive <ACK> after sending <ENQ> six times including the first one,

the instrument sends <EOT> and gives a ‘trouble’ message (note).

(Note) A trouble message is given to avoid from entering an infinite loop.

・・ ・

・・ ・

instrument

<ENQ>

<NAK> 10-second waiting

<ENQ>

<NAK> 10-second waiting

If the instrument does not receive <ACK> even after 6 transmissions of query, it

will give a ‘trouble’ message

<NAK>

<ENQ>

<EOT>

PC

Page 273: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-18

3. <ENQ receiving>

・ After sending <ENQ> and receiving <ENQ>, the instrument waits for 1 second and resends

<ENQ>(note).

・ PC after sending <ENQ> and receiving <ENQ>, will interrupt transmission and waits for <ENQ>. If

PC does not receive <ENQ> within 20-second waiting, it resends <ENQ>.

(Note) In case of collision of <ENQ> sent and received, <ENQ> sent from the instrument is given

priority and PC will wait for receiving.

4. No response

<ENQ>

instrument

<ENQ>

1-second iti

<ENQ>

<ACK>

Interrupts transmission and waits for receiving

To transmission phase (frame transmission)

PC

・ If the instrument receives no response from PC after sending <ENQ>, the instrument sends

<EOT> and gives a ‘trouble’ message (note).

(Note) A trouble message is given to detect the line disconnection such as unplugged cable.

instrument

<ENQ>

15-second waiting

<EOT>

In case of no response for 15 seconds, the instrument gives a ‘trouble’ message.

PC

Page 274: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-19

(2) <ENQ> receipt at the instrument

1. <ACK>response

・ The instrument after receiving <ENQ>, responds with <ACK> if it can communicate, and shifts to

transmission phase (frame receiving).

instrument

<ENQ>

<ACK>

Transmits <ACK> when it can communicate

To transmission phase (frame transmission)

PC

2. <NAK>response

・ The instrument after receiving <ENQ>, responds with <NAK> if it cannot communicate.

instrument

<ENQ>

<NAK>

Transmits <NAK> when it cannot communicate

PC

3. No response after sending <ACK> or <NAK>

・ The instrument after receiving <ENQ> and sending <ACK> or <NAK>, will give a ‘trouble’

message if it receives no response for 30 seconds.

(Note) Trouble message is given to avoid from entering an infinite loop.

instrument

30-second waiting <NAK>

In case of no response for 30 seconds, the instrument gives a ‘trouble’ message.

<ENQ>

PC

Page 275: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-20

6.2.4 Transmission phase

(1) Frame transfer from the instrument

1. Frame division

・ The instrument, if the length of the record is longer than maximum frame length, will divide the

record into several frames.

End frame (ETX)

instrument

<ACK>

Transfer of a record

Intermediate frame (ETB)

<ACK>

Transfer of a record

End frame (ETX)

<ACK>

Transmission in divided frames

Transmission in one frame

PC

2. Completion of all the frames transfer

The instrument, after sending all the frames, will send <EOT>.

End frame (ETX) transfer

instrument

Intermediate frame (ETB) transfer

<ACK>

<ACK>

<EOT>

When no frame is remaining, sends <EOT>.

When there is (are) remaining frame(s).

PC

Page 276: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-21

3. <NAK> reception

・ After sending Frame and receiving <NAK>, the instrument waits for 1 second and resends Frame.

・ If the instrument does not receive <NAK> after sending the same Frame for 6 times including the

first one, the instrument gives trouble message after sending <EOT> (note).

(Note) Trouble message is given to avoid from entering an infinite loop.

・・ ・

・・ ・

instrument

<NAK> 1-second iti

<NAK> 1-second iti

In case of receiving no <ACK> after 6 transmissions, the instrument gives a ‘trouble’

<NAK>

<EOT>

Frame

Frame

Frame

PC

4. No response

・ If the instrument receives no response for 15 seconds after sending a Frame, the instrument gives

trouble message after sending <EOT> (note).

(Note) A trouble message is given to detect the line disconnection such as unplugged cable.

instrument

15-second waiting

<EOT>

In case of no response for 15 seconds, the instrument gives a ‘trouble’ message.

Frame

PC

Page 277: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

(2) Frame receipt by the instrument

1. <ACK> transfer

・ When the instrument receives a frame, the instrument checks whether it correctly received the

frame. After the instrument confirms the correct receipt of the frame, it sends <ACK> when

becoming ready to receive another frame.

2. <NAK> transfer

instrument

Frame

<ACK>

The frame is correctly received.

PC

・ When the instrument receives a frame, the instrument checks whether it correctly received the

frame. In case the instrument finds any trouble with the received frame, it sends <NAK> when

becoming ready to receive the same frame again.

3. <EOT> not received yet

・ When the instrument sends a response but does not receive the next frame receipt completion or

<EOT> within 30 seconds (the time until receiving <CR> or <LF> for frame reception), it gives a

‘trouble’ message (note).

(Note) A trouble mess

instrument

Frame

<NAK>

Received frame has any trouble.

30 seconds waiting

PC

PC

instrument

<ACK> or <NAK>

In case of no response for 30 seconds, it gives a ‘trouble’ message.

age is given to a

Frame

AP2-22

void from entering an infinite loop.

Page 278: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-23

4. Not receiving all the text after receiving <STX>

・ The instrument, if it does not receive <CR> or <LF> at the end of the frame 20 seconds after

receiving <STX>, gives a ‘trouble’ message (note).

(Note) A trouble message is given to avoid from entering an infinite loop.

instrument

20 seconds waiting

If the instrument receives no end of frame for 20 seconds, the instrument gives ‘trouble’ message.

Start of frame <STX>

PC

・ The instrument regards a received frame ‘normal’ when the frame meets all the conditions below:

- The frame has no character error detectable (parity error, framing error, etc.)

- Frame checksum matches the checksum computed based on the received frame.

- The frame number equals to or larger by one than the last received one.

5. Receipt of <EOT>

・ The instrument when receiving <EOT> regards all the frames’ reception is completed.

PC instrument

frame

<ACK>

<EOT>

End of reception

Page 279: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Data Format AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-24

6.2.5 Settings of timeout, time of resending, and waiting time

(1) Error detection on AX-4030 protocol

Timeout, time of resending, waiting time can be individually set through the instrument.

Parameter Content Default

No response timeout after transmitting <ENQ> 15 seconds

No response timeout after frame transmission 15 seconds

Timeout between returning response and receiving next frame

or <EOT>.

30 seconds

Timeout

Time between receiving <STX> and the final <CR> or <LF>

during frame receipt.

20 seconds

Checksum Checksum of received data does not match. Once

Times of retransmission in case of receiving <NAK> after

sending <ENQ>.

6 times Times of

retransmission

Times of retransmission in case of receiving <NAK> after

sending a frame.

6 times

Waiting time in case of receiving <NAK> after sending

<ENQ>.

10 seconds

Waiting time in case of receiving <ENQ> after sending

<ENQ>.

1 second

Waiting time

Waiting time in case of receiving <NAK> after sending a

frame.

1 second

(2) Error judgment on the system

Individual settings can be made for several timeouts on the instrument.

Name Function Specified

value

Timeout Time before sending Query text (STX to ETX). 1 second

(communication

trouble)

Time before sending measurement result text (STX to ETB/ETX). 3 seconds

Time between issuing ID Query and receiving a response. 180 seconds *1)

*1) By ‘ID response time’ menu in the hidden service mode, this parameter can be set by every 100

msec.

Page 280: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Output Port AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-1

Appendix 2 Specification of the output data (Output Port) 1. Outline

This provides explanation on the specifications of the external output of the instrument AX-4030, in particular on the IQ connector port. For the details of format, see communication specifications for each format.

2. Types of data format specifications This instrument can output data to an external device in a new output format and in a format compatible

to convenient AX-4280, SA-4250, SA-4230, and SA-4220. Select the format in Service Mode. The communication formats are listed below. The instrument has a normal output port to connect to the host and a special port to connect to IQ.

No Output mode format Normal port IQ connection

port Communication

standard 1 AX-4030 standard format bidirectional × ASTM-1394 2 AX-4280 compatible format bidirectional/unidirectional unidirectional Compliant to Class B3 SA-4250 compatible format bidirectional/unidirectional unidirectional Compliant to Class B4 SA-4230 compatible format bidirectional/unidirectional unidirectional Compliant to Class B5 SA-4220 compatible (8A) format bidirectional/unidirectional unidirectional Compliant to Class B6 SA-4220 compatible (8B) format bidirectional/unidirectional unidirectional Compliant to Class B

1 and 2 allow selection from concentration and reflectivity for normal sample and for control solution

separately. 3 and 4 also can output with reflectivity and allow selection from individual reflectivity format for normal samples and for controls separately. 5 uses a format compatible with conventional URIFLET A. 6 is for URIFLET S and uses a newly introduced 8B test strip format. Please note that compatibility in 4 to 6 does not mean that of data expression, but that concentration and semi-quantitative symbol are output in the given position in the specified format.

3. Hardware

3.1. External output method RS-232C compatible, bit serial output

3.2. Connector

Type: DB-9, 9-pin (JIS X5103)

Pin No. Signal Note 2 RXD 3 TXD 5 GND

Page 281: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Output Port AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-2

3.3. Connector locations Connect to IQ output port.

IQ output connection port

<Caution!> This port is a normal port. As the connector has the same configuration as the special port for connection with IQ, be careful not to make a wrong connection

Rear side of the instrument

Page 282: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 2 Output Port AX-4030 Service Manual

AP2-3

4. comminication specifications

4.1.Transfer method Asynchronous communication method

4.2. Transfer rate

2400bps fixed

4.3. Data format Following compatible formats only are available. (AX-4280 compatible format/SA-4250 compatible format/

SA-4230 compatible format/SA-4220 compatible (8A) format/ SA-4220 compatible(8B) format)

1 character, 11bit configuration - start bit: 1bit - data bit: 7bit (ASCII code) - parity bit: 1bit (even parity) - stop bit: 2bit

4.4. Flow control None

4.5. Output timing

Data are output after one sample measurement is completed or when a manual re-output command is made.

5. Each communication format

See related material of external output specifications for each format of AX-4030.

Page 283: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix AX-4030 Service Manual

Page 284: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix AX-4030 Service Manual

Appendix 3

Functional specification

Page 285: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 3 Functional specification AX-4030 Service Manual

Appendix 3 Functional Specification

AX-4030 Product Specifications

Contents 1. Merchandise composition

1-1. Standard components (Refer to merchandise composition table for details.) 1-2. Articles for separate sale (optional) (Refer to merchandise composition table for details.) 1-3. Consumables for separate sale (Refer to merchandise composition table for details.)

2. Merchandise specifications 2-1. Overall specifications 2-2. Appearance sketch 2-3. Test paper related matters

2-3-1. Applicable test paper 2-3-2. Measured value display 2-3-3. Abnormal value display 2-3-4. Color tone display 2-3-5. Abnormal color generation display 2-3-6. Error display

2-4. Measurement types: 2-4-1. Ordinary measurement 2-4-2. STAT measurement 2-4-3. Control measurement 2-4-4. Check strip measurement

2-5. Product composition related matters 2-5-1. Product composition diagram (block diagram) 2-5-2. Display 2-5-3. Operator panel 2-5-4. Printer 2-5-5. External output 2-5-6. Barcode reader 2-5-7. Control unit 2-5-8. Power supply unit 2-5-9. Test strip ejection section 2-5-10. Test strip introduction section 2-5-11. Test strip type sensor 2-5-12. Test strip transport section 2-5-13. Waste box 2-5-14. Optical unit 2-5-15. Nozzle section 2-5-16. Specific gravity measurement section 2-5-17. Turbidity/Hb/Color-tone measurement section 2-5-18. Drain flow line 2-5-19. Plunger pump unit 2-5-20. Washing related 2-5-21. Sampler

AP3-1

Page 286: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 3 Functional specification AX-4030 Service Manual

1. Merchandise composition

1-1. Standard components (Refer to merchandise composition table for details.)

Name Quantity Specifications Remarks Main body Analysis part (including test paper disposal box)

1 set

Washing solution bottle set 1 set Drain bottle set 1 set Sample supply part (100 samples) 1 set 100-sample ARKRAY rack

specifications

Power source code 1 pc. Accessories Accessory case 1 set Check strip set 1 set Operation guide 1 copy Error and trouble list 1 copy Recording paper for built-in printer (containing 5 rolls)

1 box 58 mm, thermal recording paper

STAT and control rack 1 pc. Start end rack 1 pc. ARKRAY rack 1 set (10 pcs.)

1-2. Articles for separate sale (optional) (Refer to merchandise composition table for details.)

Name Quantity Specifications Remarks Handy bar code unit 1 set Hand held type Joining unit A 1 set Standard specification Extended sampler 1 set Serves both as START and

STOCK yards

Adapters 15 mm, gray 1 set 10 pieces Adapters 15 mm, light blue 1 set 10 pieces Adapters 15 mm, blue 1 set 10 pieces Adapters 15 mm, orange 1 set 10 pieces Ethernet board 1 set For connection between

AX-4030 and host

Cross cable 1 set For connection between AX-4030 and AUTION IQ

1-3. Consumables for separate sale (Refer to merchandise composition table for details.)

Name Quantity Specifications Remarks Recording paper for built-in printer (containing 5 rolls)

1 box 58 mm, thermal recording paper

Check strip set 1 set White check strips × 2, Gray check strips × 2

Concentrated washing solution 3 1 set For AX-4030, 5 bottles

AP3-2

Page 287: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 3 Functional specification AX-4030 Service Manual

2. Merchandise specifications

2-1. Overall specifications Product Fully automated urine analyzer AUTION MAX AX-4030 Sample Urine Reagent AUTION MAX test strips Measurement items GLU (Glucose), PRO (Protein), BIL (bilirubin), URO (Urobilinogen),

PH (pH), BLD (Blood), KET (Ketones), NIT (Nitrite), LEU (Leukocytes), CRE (Creatinine), P/C (Protein-to-Creatinine ratio), S.G. (Specific gravity), turbidity, and color tone

Measurement range Test strip: For rank table, see page 1-00. S.G.: 1.000 to 1.050 (Resolution: 0.001) Color tone: For color classification diagram, see “1.3

Measurement Principle”. Turbidity: Three levels including “clear”, “turbid”, and

“excessively turbid” Measurement method

Test strip: Dual-wavelength reflectance measurement (Single wavelength for BLD)

S.G.: Reflection refractometry Color tone: Light-transmission measurement Turbidity: Light-scattering measurement

Measurement wavelength

5 LED wavelengths (430, 500, 565, 635, 760 nm)

Sample supply Sampler Test strip reaction About 60 seconds Test strip storage Two test strip storage compartments, each of which can contain

different test strips Test strip storage capacity

Max. 200 test strips × two storage compartments

Processing speed 225 sample/hour Sample consumption 0.90 mL Required sample volume

Min. 2.0 mL

Sample container Sample tubes manufactured by Ono Pharmaceutical Co., LTD. or equivalent

Applicable racks ARKRAY racks Sample loading capacity

One-way transportation (default): Max. 50 samples, Loop transportation: Max. 100 samples

Warm-up time Max. 2 minutes Display Large color liquid crystal display (320 × 240 dots) Built-in printer 58-mm width thermal printer paper (24 digits) Memory capacity Normal and STAT measurement: 2500 tests

Control measurement: 200 tests Check measurement: 50 tests Trouble list: 100 tests

External output 2 ports (One of these ports can be optionally used as an Ethernet port.)

Communication system

Compliant with RS-232C (Switchable between one-way and two-way)

Transmission speed RS-232C: Selectable from 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200 bps

Ethernet: 10BASE-T Thermal compensation

Supported

Operating Temperature: 10 - 30°C; Humidity: 20 - 80% RH

AP3-3

Page 288: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 3 Functional specification AX-4030 Service Manual

environment (Non-condensing) Measurement environment

Temperature: 10 - 30°C; Humidity: 30 - 60% RH (Non-condensing)

Storage environment Temperature: 10 - 30°C; Humidity: 20 - 80% RH (Non-condensing)

Dimensions 530 (W) × 530 (D) × 530 (H) mm Weight Instrument: approx. 37 kg, Sampler: approx. 4 kg DC power requirements (to instrument)

100 - 240 V AC, 50 - 60 Hz

Power input Max. 150 VA Sound pressure level Less than 85 dB Site location For indoor use only Altitude 2000 m Pollution degree 2 Over voltage category

II

Expected life 5 years from first use (installation) of instrument (According to company data)

AP3-4

Page 289: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 3 Functional specification AX-4030 Service Manual

2-2. Appearance sketch

Design sketch

AP3-5

Page 290: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 3 Functional specification AX-4030 Service Manual

2-3. Test paper related matters

2-3-1. Applicable test paper

Applicable test paper varies depending on sales areas and users' sample number levels.

Types of applicable test paper therefore should be selectable to users.

2-3-2. Measured value display

The instrument is a model succeeding the full automatic models (SA-4220, SA-4230,

SA-4250, AX-4280) already on the market. Displays same as those on these models are

required and a threshold value table changeover method is employed.

2-3-3. Abnormal value display

An abnormality flag, the type of measurement and measurement number appear at the

beginning of the results report.

■ Abnormality flag

An abnormal result is flagged with an abnormal mark. The whole first line appears in

reverse video to make it immediately recognizable. The “?” flag has the priority against

the ”●” flag.

● : The sample is positive or abnormally colored.

? : The instrument is operating abnormally.

■ Abnormality flag

Abnormal results obtained with the test strips are flagged with the “*” or “!” mark. A “!”

has a higher priority over a “*”.

(Blank) : Normal (negative)

* : Abnormal value (positive)

! : Abnormal color (positive)

2-3-4. Color tone display

The color tone of samples is determined from 23 colors, which includes 21 combinations of

7 colors (yellow, orange, brown, red, violet, blue, and green) and 3 intensity levels (light,

normal, dark), colorless, and others.

2-3-5. Abnormal color generation display

The instrument automatically detects false positive reactions of reagent pads caused by

drug-administered urine and notifies you by adding a “!” to printed measurement results.

Measurement results are displayed along with “!” mark when abnormal color generation

occurs during measurement of Bil, Uro, Ket and Bld.

2-3-6. Error display

Error is displayed as number.

2-4. Measurement types:

2-4-1. Ordinary measurement

Measure continuously samples set on rack. Up to 100 samples maximum can be set on rack

at a time. (When rack feed is in circulation mode.)

AP3-6

Page 291: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 3 Functional specification AX-4030 Service Manual

2-4-2. STAT measurement

Use STAT measurement when samples for urgent measurement develop during ordinary

measurement. Suspend ordinary measurement and set urgent samples on exclusive STAT

port or STAT control rack 1 to 7 holes for STAT measurement. (Same as AX-4280.)

Ordinary measurement resumes on completion of STAT measurement.

2-4-3. Control measurement

Periodical measurement of control urine allows data accuracy control. Use of exclusive

STAT and control rack allows measurement of controls of 3 concentrations.

2-4-4. Check strip measurement

Use check strips to verify optical system state of the instrument.

AP3-7

Page 292: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 3 Functional specification AX-4030 Service Manual

2-5. Product composition related matters

2-5-1. Product composition diagram (block diagram)

Opticalunit

Introductionsection

Transportsection

Test strip feederWashing bath

Nozzle drivesectiont

Specific gravity/turbiditymeasurement section

SamplerPump section

Drain bottle

Barcode readerLiquiddetection

Washingsolution bottle

Main CPU

Panel CPU

Sheet key LCD displayerPrinter

Externaloutput

Hand-held Barcodereader

Pulse motor controler

Feeder sub CPU

Sampler sub CPUA/D sub CPU

Test strip typesennsor

2-5-2. Display

Displays the type of measurement, time, measurement number, port number, menu, type of

test strip, etc.

(1) Manufacturer: Kyocera

(2) Model: KCG047QV1AA-G03

(3) Display area: 320×240 dot [Effective area: 302 x 231 dots]

(4) Device: 4.7-inch backlit color LCD

(5) Screen dimensions: 93 mm × 71.5 mm

(6) Display content: Standby screen, measurement screen, menu screen, etc.

2-5-3. Operator panel

(1) Material: Polyethylene sheet

(2) Sheet keys

・START key: Starts measurements, calibration by specific gravity meter and washing.

・STOP key: Stops measurements.

・STAT key: Starts STAT measurement.

・ENTER key: Confirms settings and input values, etc.

・- key: For changing selection, etc.

・0 - 9 keys: Inputs numerical values.

・Function keys: Functions change according to screen and situation.

・FEED key: Feeds thermal printer paper.

AP3-8

Page 293: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 3 Functional specification AX-4030 Service Manual

2-5-4. Printer

Prints type of measurement, measurement number, port number, ID, date, type of test strip,

temperature, measurement results, abnormal marks, and error messages for each

measurement.

(1) Manufacturer: Seiko Instruments

(2) Model: LTPH245A-C384

(3) Printing system: Thermal line dot printing

(4) Total dots: 384 dots (Horizontal)

(5) Dot dimensions: 0.125mm × 0.125mm

(6) Recording paper width: 58 mm

(7) Printed content: Type of measurement, measurement number, port number, ID,

date, time, type of test strip, temperature, measurement

item, qualitative values, semi-quantitative values,

reflectivity, units, color tone, abnormal marks, error

messages, etc.

2-5-5. External output

Standard equipment

1. RS-232C

(1) Protocol: RS-232C compliant (Synchronous)

One/two-way communications

(2) Transmission speed: 300/600/1200/2400/4800/9600/19200 bps

(Selected from software)

(3) Start bit: 1 bit

(4) Data bits: 7 bits

(5) Stop bit: 2 bits

(6) XON/OFF: None

(7) Output format: Mode selection from software

AP3-9

Page 294: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 3 Functional specification AX-4030 Service Manual

2. RS-232C

(1) Protocol: RS-232C compliant (Synchronous)

One-way communications

(2) Transmission speed: 2400bps

(3) Start bit: 1 bit

(4) Data bits: 7 bits

(5) Stop bit: 2 bits

(6) XON/OFF: None

(7) Output format: AX-4280 one-way format

* This port is used for expansion (i.e., connection to AUTION IQ, etc.)

Optional equipment

As an option, it is possible to change the standard RS-232C (described in 1) to an

optional Ethernet board (10BASE-T, ARKRAY standard option).

2-5-6. Barcode reader

1. Built-in barcode reader

(1) Manufacturer: Keyence

(2) Model: BL-185(Side type)

(3) Reading speed: 33 mm±10 mm

(However, 33 mm±5 mm for narrow bar widths of

less than 0.19 mm.)

(4) Narrow bar width: 0.125mm - 1.0mm (Standard:0.19mm)

(5) Max. readable label width: 80mm (However, only for narrow bar widths of 0.19

mm and wider.)

(6) PCS: 0.45 or more (For white reflectivity of 75% or more)

(7) Scans: 500 scan/sec

(8) Readable codes: CODE39, NW-7,JAN/EAN/UPC (A,E),

CODE128, ITF, Industrial 2of5,COOP2of5

(4 of above types can be set.)

(9) Readable columns: Max. 32

(10)Purpose of use: Reading barcode labels on sample tubes loaded into

racks

AP3-10

Page 295: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 3 Functional specification AX-4030 Service Manual

2. Hand-held barcode reader

(1) Manufacturer: Keyence

(2) Model: BL-N60RK

(3) Reading speed: 0 - 30 mm

(4) Narrow bar width: 0.125 mm or more

(5) Max. readable label width: 65 mm (Including quiet zone)

(6) Scans: 100 scan/sec

(7) Readable codes: CODE39, ITF, IATA, Industrial 2of5,

NW-7, JAN/EAN/UPC, CODE93,

CODE128, EAN-128

(8) Purpose of use: Reading barcode labels on STAT sample tubes

2-5-7. Control unit

(1) Main CPU: H8S/2633F, Hitachi

(2) AD subCPU: H8S/2633F, Hitachi

(3) PMC subCPU: H8S/2633F, Hitachi

(4) Panel subCPU: H8S/2633F, Hitachi

(5) Sampler subCPU: H8/3687F, Hitachi

(6) Drive subCPU: H8S/2633F, Hitachi

※ The board is shared with the PMC, but software differs.

2-5-8. Power supply unit

(1) Manufacturer: Densei-Lambda

(2) Model: ZWD225PAF-0524/T

(3) Power input: 85V-265 V AC 50 Hz/60 Hz Max. 240 VA

(4) Power output: +24 V,5 V DC

(5) Supported standards: Compliant with UL and CE

2-5-9. Test strip ejection section

(1) Applicable test strips: Uriflet S-U、AUTION Sticks

(2) Test strip storage capacity: 2 compartments, Max. 200 each

(3) Exposure stability: 3 days after loading test strips

(4) Test strip feeding: Rotating drum

(5) Feed speed: 213 strip/hr or more

(6) Sensors: Test strip detection, front side detection

AP3-11

Page 296: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 3 Functional specification AX-4030 Service Manual

2-5-10. Test strip introduction section

(1) Transport: Sliding by arm

(2) Operation: Test strip reception (Feeder) → Type detection (test strip type sensor)

→ Staining (Nozzle)

2-5-11. Test strip type sensor

(1) Method: Scanning of test strip pad

(2) Detection: Reflectance sensor

2-5-12. Test strip transport section

(1) Transport method: Sideward transport of test strips

(2) Transport time: 60 sec(Reaction time)

(3) Temperature control function: None (Handled by thermal compensation function)

2-5-13. Waste box

(1) Waste box: 400 strips or more capacity

(2) Full detection: Reflectance sensor

AP3-12

Page 297: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 3 Functional specification AX-4030 Service Manual

2-5-14. Optical unit

The optical unit checks light intensity on a white plate, then moves to the black marker on the

test strip and starts scanning. The type of test strip is identified by measuring the position and

width of the black marker.

(1) Light source: Dual-wavelength LED and single wavelength LED

(5 wavelengths/9 elements)

(2) Wavelengths: 430,500,565,635,760 nm

(3) Detector: Silicon photodiode

(4) Irradiation position: Irradiated from perimeter, detected at center

(5) Irradiation angle: 45°

(6) Distance from test strip: 3.5 mm

(7) Spot diameter: 3 mm

(8) Scan frequency: 2 times

(9) Scan pitch: 0.24 mm

(10) Light intensity checked by measuring white plate

(11) Test strip type and position identified by detecting black marker on test strip

(12) Measurement items and wavelengths GLU/PRO/pH/CRE: 635 nm/760 nm KET/NIT/LEU/URO/BIL: 565 nm/760 nm Bld: 635 nm Abnormal coloration: 430/500/565/635 nm Type of test strip (Black marker detection): 430/500/565/635/760 nm

(13)Temperature measurement function:

Sensor located near to optical unit (For thermal compensation)

2-5-15. Nozzle section

(1) Operation: Washing bath → Sample tube → Individual pads on test

strips

(2) Liquid sensor: Nozzle level detection by electrostatic capacity

(3) Required sample volume: 2 mL or less

(4) Sample consumption: 0.09 mL or less

(5) Sample staining volume: 6 - 10 µL

(Suitable sample volume for each pad is under study.)

(6) Drive method: LM guide and belt

(7) Drive motor: (Front-Rear) 5-phase stepping motor

(Up-Down) 5-phase stepping motor

(8) Feed: (Front-Rear) 0.08 mm/Step

(Up-Down) 0.08 mm/Step

(9) Nozzle washing: Internal flushing of nozzle with washing solution. Outside

washed by overflow.

AP3-13

Page 298: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 3 Functional specification AX-4030 Service Manual

2-5-16. Specific gravity measurement section

(1) Manufacturer: Atago

(2) Model: PR-ARK

(3) Measurement principle: Reflection refractometry

(4) Measurement range: 1.000 - 1.050

(5) Resolution: 0.001

(6) Calibration: Calibration using 2 types (high/low) of standard solutions

(7) Correction: Thermal compensation (by temperature sensor), GLU

compensation, PRO compensation

2-5-17. Turbidity/Hb/Color-tone measurement section

(1) Measurement principle: See “1.3 Measurement Principle”.

(2) Measurement range: Turbidity: -(Clear),+1(Turbid),+2(Very turbid)

Color-tone: 23 types, See “1.1 General Specifications”.

Hb: Can detect Hb concentrations near to 25 mg/dL.

(3) Light source: 470/525/635 nm

(4) Cell: Flow cell (Material: Pyrex)

(5) Detector: Silicon photodiode

(6) Calibration: Turbidity: Calibration using 1 type of standard solution

Hb: Calibration using 1 type of standard solution

AP3-14

Page 299: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 3 Functional specification AX-4030 Service Manual

2-5-18. Drain flow line

Perista pump

(1) Purpose of use: Pumping of liquid waste from trap bottle

(2) Drive method: Direct drive

(3) Drive motor: DC motor

(4) Pumping rate: 142 mL/min.

Air pump

(1) Purpose of use: Depressurization of trap bottle

(2) Type: Diaphragm

(3) Drive motor: DC motor

(4) Max. discharge rate: 5 L/min.

Trap bottle

(1) Purpose of use: Liquid aspiration from washing bath by internal pressure reduction

in bottle

Pinch valve

(1) Purpose of use: Closing of flow line during bottle internal depressurization

(2) Rated voltage: 24 V

AP3-15

Page 300: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 3 Functional specification AX-4030 Service Manual

2-5-19. Plunger pump unit

Sampling pump

(1) Purpose of use: Sample staining and aspiration

(2) Max. capacity: 236.6 uL

(3) Withstand pressure: 0.3 MPa

(4) Resolution: 0.169 uL/pulse

(5) Drive motor: 2-phase stepping motor

(6) Service-life: 3 million cycles or more

Washing pump

(1) Purpose of use: Flow line charging and washing, sample aspiration

(2) Max. capacity: 4390 uL

(3) Withstand pressure: 0.4 MPa

(4) Resolution: 3.135 uL/pulse

(5) Drive motor: 2-phase stepping motor

(6) Service-life: 3 million cycles or more

2-5-20. Washing related

(1) Washing solution: Triton X-100, trisodium phosphate, sodium azide, purified water

(2) Consumption: Approx. 5 mL per measurement, Approx. 400 measurement with

2 L bottle

(3) Liquid detection: Level detection by reflectance PI sensor

(4) Drain bottle: 3 L(Without overflow detection)

2-5-21. Sampler

ARKRAY standard sampler

(1) Sample loading capacity: Max. 100 (50 in one-way transportation)

(2) Transport direction: Right to left (CCW)

(3) Applicable rack: ARKRAY rack

(4) Sample container: Urine sample tube (Sample tube, Ono Pharmaceutical)

(5) Container detection: Detection by reflectance PI sensor

(6) Special rack: Start rack, STAT and control rack

(7) Barcode reader: BL-185 (Keyence), See “3.5 Barcode reader”.

(8) STAT port: For sample tube

AP3-16

Page 301: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix AX-4030 Service Manual

Page 302: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix AX-4030 Service Manual

Appendix 4

Specification of the error

Page 303: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-1

Appendix 4 Specification of the errorContents

1. Overview ··········································································································································· 3

2. Measurement-Related Messages ···································································································· 3 2.1. Results-Related Errors························································································································3

No sample ···········································································································································3 Skipped ···············································································································································3 Reflection light intensity drift ···············································································································4 Excess reflectivity································································································································4 Test strip out-of-position······················································································································4 Abnormal sampling······························································································································5

2.2. S.G. Measurement-Related Errors······································································································5 UNDER················································································································································5 OVER ··················································································································································5 --------- ··················································································································································5 CAL. ERR.···········································································································································6

2.3. Turbidity Measurement-Related Errors·······························································································6 CAL. ERR.···········································································································································6 ERROR ···············································································································································6

2.4. Messages on the Abnormal Results List···························································································7aBarcode misread ·································································································································7 No sample ···········································································································································7 Measurement error······························································································································7 Abnormal data ·····································································································································7 Positive sample ···································································································································7 S.G. measurement error······················································································································8 Turbidity measurement error ···············································································································8

3. Warnings··········································································································································· 8 3.1. W001: Out of test strips·······················································································································8 3.2. W002: Empty STAT port ·····················································································································9 3.3. W003: Out of washing solution ···········································································································9 3.4. W004: Full waste box························································································································10 3.5. W005: Full sampler unloading side···································································································10 3.6. W006: Open feeder cover ·················································································································11 3.7. W007: Optical unit LED light intensity check ····················································································11 3.8. W008: Wrong test strip feeder selection ···························································································12 3.9. W009: Out of printer paper················································································································12 3.10. W010: Incomplete S.G. calibration····································································································13 3.11. W011: Test strip jam ·························································································································13 3.12. Icons··················································································································································14

4. Errors ·············································································································································· 15 4.1. E101: Version change·······················································································································15 4.2. E102: Power down ····························································································································15 4.3. E103: Battery voltage error ···············································································································15 4.4. E104: Backup data error ···················································································································16 4.5. E110: Test strip pads error················································································································16 4.6. E120: S.G. calibration failure ············································································································17 4.7. E121: Turbidity calibration failure······································································································18 4.8. E122: Hb calibration failure ···············································································································18 4.9. E130: Two-way communication error ·······························································································19 4.10. E140: Test strip marker error ············································································································19

Page 304: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-2

5. Trouble ············································································································································ 20

5.1. T999: Unknown trouble ·····················································································································20 5.2. T201: Data ROM trouble ···················································································································20 5.3. T202: Internal communication trouble·······························································································20 5.4. T203: No calibration curve ················································································································22 5.5. T210: Test strip introduction section drive trouble ············································································22 5.6. T211: Test strip transport section drive trouble·················································································23 5.7. T212: Test strip identification section drive trouble···········································································23 5.8. T220: Optical unit drive trouble ·········································································································24 5.9. T221: A/D overflow····························································································································25 5.10. T222: Optical unit trouble ··················································································································26 5.11. T223: Optical unit undetected marker·······························································································27 5.12. T230: Feeder drive trouble················································································································28 5.13. T240: Nozzle drive trouble ················································································································29 5.14. T241: Sampling trouble ·····················································································································30 5.15. T250: S.G. hydrometer trouble··········································································································30 5.16. T251: Turbidimeter trouble················································································································31 5.17. T252: Tintometer trouble···················································································································32 5.18. T260: Washing solution pump trouble ······························································································33 5.19. T261: Sampling pump trouble ···········································································································33 5.20. T270: Measurement lever drive trouble ····························································································34 5.21. T271: Return lever drive trouble········································································································35 5.22. T272: Loading side full ······················································································································35 5.23. T280: Overflow··································································································································36 5.24. T290: Cover open ·····························································································································36

Page 305: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-3

1. Overview This document explains warnings, errors and troubles that may occur with the AX-4030.

2. Measurement-Related Messages Measurement-related errors do not appear on the display but are printed on measurement result reports and abnormal results lists. 2.1. Results-Related Errors If a measurement result is not obtained, the below messages are printed. Causes and remedies are shown in the following tables. These errors occur when an abnormal sample (e.g., drug-administered urine, highly turbid urine, etc.) is measured, but if they occur frequently despite taking remedial action, there is something wrong with the instrument. In such case, turn off the power and contact the distributor.

No sample No sample was detected.

Cause Remedy The sample tube is empty. Ensure the sample tube contains at least 2 mL of sample, and

the sample level is 40 mm above the bottom of the tube. ↓ Retry measurement. ↓ If the error persists, turn off the power and contact the distributor.

Air is trapped in the flow lines. Eliminate the cause for air infiltrating the flow lines (e.g. pump seal failure, etc.).

Skipped The sample was not measured. (This error occurs when the instrument is set not to measure samples if barcodes are misread.)

Cause Remedy The host instructs the instrument not to measure the sample.

The sample tube is not labeled with a barcode, or the label is too dirty to read.

Newly label the sample tube, and retry measurement.

The barcode is labeled out of position.

Reattach the label in the correct position ↓ Retry measurement.

The built-in barcode reader is out of order. Turn off the power, and contact the distributor.

Page 306: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-4

Reflection light intensity drift Light intensity varied during measurement.

Cause Remedy Outside light is penetrating the optical unit. Check that the waste box is set correctly.

↓ If the error persists, turn off the power and contact the distributor.

Excess reflectivity The reflectivity for one or more measurement items exceeded 120%. * The result will be obtained regardless of this error.

Cause Remedy The instrument measured a test strip other than that set by key operation.

Make the correct settings for the type of test strips to be loaded into the feeder. ↓ Load the correct test strips into the feeder. ↓ Measure the sample again.

The instrument measured an abnormal sample (e. g. drug-administered urine).

Check to see if the sample is of acceptable quality for the instrument. ↓ If the sample is acceptable, retry measurement.

Test strip out-of-position The test strip is placed out of the correct position.

Cause Remedy The test strip was not properly positioned in the optical unit.

Pull out the waste box tray and discard the used test strips. ↓ Make sure the instrument is not in operation, then press the standby switch to turn off the power. ↓ Pull out the transport tray. ↓ Remove test strips scattered around. ↓ Attach the transport tray and close the covers. ↓ Press the standby switch to turn on the power, and retry measurement.

Page 307: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-5

Abnormal sampling The nozzle could not drop the sample on the test strip.

Cause Remedy The sample is unacceptable to the instrument (e. g. drug-administered urine).

Check to see if the sample is acceptable to the instrument. ↓ If the sample is an acceptable kind of urine, retry measurement.

Trouble occurred in the flow lines. Make sure the instrument is not in operation, then press the standby switch to turn off the power. ↓ Check the flow lines and washing solution filter for clogging or leaks. ↓ Press the standby switch to turn on the power, and retry measurement.

The liquid sensor of the washing solution bottle is damaged.

Check to see if the washing solution bottle contains a sufficient volume of solution. ↓ If “W003” does not occur though the washing solution bottle is empty, turn off the power. ↓ Contact the distributor.

2.2. S.G. Measurement-Related Errors If a correct S.G. measurement result is not obtained, the following messages are printed. Causes and remedies are shown in the following tables.

UNDER The S.G. cell is dirty.

Cause Remedy The result obtained from S.G. measurement is lower than the allowable range.

Wash the S.G. cell. ↓ Retry measuring the sample.

OVER The S.G. cell is dirty.

Cause Remedy The result obtained from S.G. measurement is higher than the allowable range.

Wash the S.G. cell. ↓ Retry measuring the sample.

--------- The S.G. was not measured.

Cause Remedy The S.G. measurement was not made for some reason.

Eliminate the cause. ↓ Retry measuring the sample.

Page 308: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-6

CAL. ERR. S.G. calibration has not been made.

Cause Remedy S.G. calibration has not been performed. Perform S.G. calibration.

2.3. Turbidity Measurement-Related Errors If a correct turbidity measurement result is not obtained, the following messages are printed. Causes and remedies are shown in the following tables.

CAL. ERR. Cause Remedy

The result obtained from turbidity measurement is lower than the specified range.

Turn off the power, and contact the distributor.

ERROR Cause Remedy

Turbidity measurement was not made for some reason.

Remove the cause. ↓ Retry to measure the sample.

Page 309: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-7

2.4. Messages on the Abnormal Results List When an abnormal results list is printed from the menu, errors that occurred after power-on are printed in list format. If a correct measurement result is not obtained, the following messages are printed. Causes and remedies are shown in the following tables.

Barcode misread The barcode could not be read from the sample tube.

Cause Remedy The sample tube is not labeled with a barcode, or the barcode is too dirty to read.

Newly label the sample tube, and retry measurement.

The barcode is labeled out of position. Reattach the label in the correct position. ↓ Retry measurement.

The built-in barcode reader is out of order. Turn off the power, and contact the distributor.

No sample No sample was detected.

Cause Remedy The sample tube is empty. Ensure the sample tube contains at least 2 mL of sample, and

the sample level is 40 mm above the bottom of the tube. ↓ Retry measurement. ↓ If the error persists, turn off the power and contact the distributor.

Measurement error A measurement error occurred.

Cause Remedy Measurement was not made on this sample. * This error occurs when the instrument is set not to measure samples if barcodes are misread.

See “Skipped” in the “Measurement-related Errors” section.

Light intensity varied during measurement. See “Reflection light intensity drift” in the “Measurement-related Errors” section.

The reflectivity of one or more measurement items exceeded 120%.

See “Excess reflectivity” in the “Measurement-related Errors” section.

The test strip is out of the correct position. See “Test strip out-of-position” in the “Measurement-related Errors” section.

Sampling failed. See “Abnormal sampling” in the “Measurement-related Errors” section.

Abnormal data Abnormal colors were developed on one or more reagent pads on the test strip.

Cause Remedy Abnormal colored urine was measured, or the obtained result includes abnormal data.

Check the sample.

Positive sample The obtained result includes positive values for one or more measurement items.

Cause Remedy

Page 310: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-8

The instrument measured a positive sample Check the sample.

S.G. measurement error The instrument could not obtain a correct S.G. calibration result.

Cause Remedy No S.G. measurement result is present. Perform S.G. calibration. The S.G. cell is dirty.

Wash the S.G. cell.

The S.G. measurement result exceeds the specified range.

Prepare new S.G. standard solutions and retry S.G. measurement.

Abnormally colored urine was measured. Check the sample.

Turbidity measurement error The instrument could not obtain a correct turbidity measurement result.

Cause Remedy No turbidity measurement result is present. Turn off the power, and contact the distributor. An abnormal turbidity measurement result was obtained.

Turn off the power, and contact the distributor.

3. Warnings 3.1. W001: Out of test strips Item Description Detail The feeder has run out of test strips. Cause • The feeder has run out of test strips.

• The test strip detection sensor is dirty or damaged. Detection method The feeder could not pick a test strip after 50 consecutive tries. Instrument reaction 1) Sampling is suspended.

The test strip icon appears on the display. 2) Measurement is performed for test strips that are undergoing reactions. 3) A message appears on the display.

Remedy by user • Add new test strips to the feeder. Remedy by manufacturer • Clean or replace the test strip detection sensor.

• Adjust sensitivity of the test strip detection sensor from its electronic volume. Message The feeder has run out of test strips.

Load new strips to continue. Detailed information 1 001: Occurred with feeder 1.

002: Occurred with feeder 2. Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this warning occurred. Remarks • There is a test strip detection sensor on each the left and right sides.

Page 311: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-9

3.2. W002: Empty STAT port Item Description Detail There was no sample in the STAT port, or the sample was incorrectly placed in the STAT

port before starting port STAT measurement. Cause • No sample was set in the STAT port.

• The sample was not correctly set in the STAT port. • The STAT port sample detection PI is dirty or damaged.

Detection method The STAT port sample detection PI did not activate when the user imparted START measurement.

Instrument reaction 1) A message appears on the display. Remedy by user • Place the sample in the STAT port correctly. Remedy by manufacturer • Clean or replace the STAT port sample detection PI. Message The STAT port is empty.

Set a sample as explained in the operating manual and try again. Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this warning occurred. Remarks

3.3. W003: Out of washing solution Item Description Detail The washing solution has run out. Cause • The washing solution bottle was low when measurement started.

• Numerous samples were measured consecutively. • The washing solution bottle sensor was not put in the bottle. • The connector of the washing solution bottle sensor was disconnected. • Deterioration or poor contact occurred in the connector of the washing solution bottle sensor.

• The washing solution bottle sensor was damaged. Detection method The washing solution bottle sensor is tripped. Instrument reaction 1) Sampling is suspended.

The washing solution bottle icon appears on the display. 2) Measurement is performed for test strips that are undergoing reactions. 3) A message appears on the display. 4) If the user adds washing solution, solution filling operations are performed.

Remedy by user • Add newly prepared solution to the bottle. • Connect the sensor connector of the washing solution bottle to the instrument correctly.

Remedy by manufacturer Replace the washing solution bottle sensor. Message The washing solution has run out.

Add fresh washing solution to continue. Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this warning occurred. Remarks

Page 312: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-10

3.4. W004: Full waste box Item Description Detail The waste box was full of used test strips. Cause • Measurement was started with the waste box full of test strips.

• The waste box full detection sensor is dirty or damaged. • The waste box is not correctly set in place.

Detection method The waste box full detection sensor tripped. Instrument reaction 1) Sampling is suspended.

The waste box icon appears on the display. 2) Measurement is performed for test strips that are undergoing reactions. 3) A message appears on the display.

Remedy by user • Pull out the waste box tray and discard the used test strips. Remedy by manufacturer • Clean or replace the waste box full detection sensor. Message The waste box is full; empty the box.

Or, strips cannot drop in the box; fit the box in the tray correctly and close the tray. Detailed information 1 001: Waste box is full.

002: Waste box is not correctly set. Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this warning occurred. Remarks

3.5. W005: Full sampler unloading side Item Description Detail The unloading side of the sampler is full of the sample racks. Cause • A 6th rack was set on the unloading side of the sampler.

• Racks were not removed from the unloading side of the sampler. • Racks could not be vertically moved on the unloading side of the sampler. • The unloading edge detection PI is dirty or damaged. • The unloading belt did not turn.

Detection method The unloading belt turned to eject racks for which sampling was finished, but the unloading edge detection PI remained activated.

Instrument reaction 1) Sampling is suspended. The rack icon appears on the display.

2) Measurement is performed for test strips that are undergoing reactions. 3) A message appears on the display.

Remedy by user • Take the sample racks out of the unloading side. Remedy by manufacturer • Clean or replace the unloading edge detection PI. Message The rack unloading side is full.

Remove racks. Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 Task status Detailed information 3 Program line where this warning occurred. Remarks

Page 313: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-11

3.6. W006: Open feeder cover Item Description Detail The feeder cover was opened. Cause • The feeder cover was opened.

• The feeder cover PI is dirty or damaged. Detection method The feeder cover PI tripped. Instrument reaction 1) A message appears on the display. Remedy by user • Close the feeder cover. Remedy by manufacturer • Clean or replace the feeder cover PI. Message Close the feeder cover. Detailed information 1 001: Occurred with feeder 1.

002: Occurred with feeder 2. 003: Occurred with both feeders.

Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this warning occurred. Remarks This warning occurs only during measurement.

3.7. W007: Optical unit LED light intensity check Item Description Detail Trouble was detected in the optical unit LED light intensity check that is performed at

power-on. Cause • LED light intensity varied (dropped, etc.).

• The white plate is dirty or worn. • The optical unit detection device is damaged.

Detection method • LED light intensity measured off the white plate was outside the specified range. Instrument reaction 1) A message appears on the display. Remedy by user • Replace the white plate with a new one and clear the warning.

• If the warning persists, contact the distributor. Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the optical unit. Message Replace the white plate to adjust LED intensity, and then cancel this warning. Detailed information 1 001: Low light intensity

002: High light intensity Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this warning occurred. Remarks

Page 314: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-12

3.8. W008: Wrong test strip feeder selection Item Description Detail The user selected a feeder for which the test strip type settings have not been made. Cause • The wrong feeder number was specified. Detection method • The instrument detected that the feeder with no test strip type setting was selected. Instrument reaction 1) Sampling is suspended.

The test strip icon appears on the display. 2) Measurement is performed for test strips that are undergoing reactions. 3) A message appears on the display.

Remedy by user • Measure samples using test strips from the main feeder. • Set the correct test strips and retry measurement.. If the warning persists, contact the distributor.

Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the test strip identification section. Message The test strip type for the selected feeder is not specified.

Press [Continue] to use test strips in the main feeder. Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this warning occurred. Remarks

3.9. W009: Out of printer paper Item Description Detail The thermal printer paper has run out. Cause • The thermal printer paper has run out.

• The thermal printer paper is not loaded correctly. • The printer is damaged.

Detection method The printer paper detection sensor tripped. Instrument reaction During measurement:

A message and the printer icon appear on the display.Other than during measurement:

A message appears on the display. Remedy by user • Load the printer paper correctly. Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the printer. Message Printer paper has run out. Load new paper. Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this warning occurred. Remarks The printer icon does not appear on the display if the warning occurs while the

instrument is on standby.

Page 315: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-13

3.10. W010: Incomplete S.G. calibration Item Description Detail The existing S.G. calibration result was invalidated. Cause • S.G. calibration was not performed at the set interval.

• Backup data was erased. Detection method Whether the set interval has elapsed or not is calculated from the saved last calibration

date and time and the current date and time. Instrument reaction A message appears on the display. Remedy by user • Perform S.G. calibration. Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the backup RAM.

• Replace the board that the backup RAM is mounted on. Message Measurement cannot start. Perform S.G. calibration to enable measurement. Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this warning occurred Remarks S.G. calibration interval is set from the service menu. Setting it to “0” turns this feature

off. 3.11. W011: Test strip jam Item Description Detail The feeder cannot eject the test strips correctly. Cause • Several test strips are trapped inside the feeder or sticking together. Detection method The test strip detection sensor of the feeder detected the set number of empty feeds. Instrument reaction A message and the test strip icon appears on the display.Remedy by user • Mix the test strips in the feeder. Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the feeder unit. Message The test strips are not sent out of the feeder correctly.

To continue measurement, mix the test strips in the feeder. Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this warning occurred Remarks

Page 316: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-14

3.12. Icons

Measuring…

2004-06-03 10:00 Port No. 0001 Measurement No. 0001 ID ------------------ Test strip type 1:10EA

Results Stop

:W001: Out of test strips

W008: Wrong test strip feeder selection

W011: Test strip jam

:W003: Out of washing solution

:W004: Full waste box

:W005: Full sampler unloading side

:W009: Out of printer paper

Page 317: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-15

4. Errors 4.1. E101: Version change Item Description Detail The instrument detected a different version of the main ROM from that detected at the

last startup. Cause The main ROM was exchanged. Detection method The version stored in the backup RAM was different from that of the main ROM. Instrument reaction A message appears on the display. Remedy by user None Remedy by manufacturer None Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this error occurred. Remarks

4.2. E102: Power down Item Description Detail The instrument was accidentally turned off during normal, STAT, or check

measurement. Cause The user turned off the instrument.

A power failure occurred. Detection method The flag that is set in the backup RAM area at startup stays in the set status. Instrument reaction A message appears on the display. Remedy by user Retry measuring the sample that was being measured when the error occurred. Remedy by manufacturer None Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this error occurred. Remarks

4.3. E103: Battery voltage error Item Description Detail The voltage of the backup battery has dropped. Cause The backup battery naturally discharged while the instrument was not in use for several

days. The battery is degraded.

Detection method The instrument checked specific data in the fixed area and found that the data had been rewritten.

Instrument reaction 1) A message appears on the display. Remedy by user • Set the date and time correctly.

• Keep the instrument powered on for at least 24 hours to charge the battery. • If the error persists, contact the distributor.

Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the board. Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this error occurred. Remarks

Page 318: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-16

4.4. E104: Backup data error Item Description Detail The backup data was corrupted for some reason. Cause The memory board for storing data was removed.

The backup battery is not working. Detection method The checksum of the backup data did not match. Instrument reaction 1) A message appears on the display. Remedy by user • Set the date and time correctly.

• Keep the instrument powered on for at least 24 hours to charge the battery. • If the error persists, contact the distributor.

Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the board. • Replace the backup RAM.

Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this error occurred. Remarks

4.5. E110: Test strip pads error Item Description Detail The number of test strips pads set in the instrument differed from the number of detected

pads. Cause • The wrong test strip type was set.

• The feeder contains two or more types of test strips. • Test strips from earlier measurements remained in the feeder when it was loaded anew. • The test strip identification sensor is dirty or damaged. • Trouble occurred in the test strip identification section. • Test strips came out of place because of trouble with the test strip introduction mechanism.

• The transport tray is dirty. • The test strip identification sensor was not adequately adjusted.

Detection method The test strip identification section counted the number of pads and compared that number to the set number of pads. As a result, the number of pads differed.

Instrument reaction 1) A message appears on the display. The sample being sampled is stained.

2) Sampling is suspended. 3) Measurement is performed for test strips that are undergoing reactions. 4) Measurement ends.

Remedy by user • Load the test strips into the feeder correctly. • Clean the transport tray.

Remedy by manufacturer • Clean or replace the test strip identification sensor. • Adjust the test strip identification sensor.

Detailed information 1 XXX:Number of pads counted by the test strip identification section Detailed information 2 XXX:Set number of test strip pads Detailed information 3 Program line where this error occurred. Remarks This error occurs the first time that the number of pads differs. (The instrument does not

wait for this error to trigger several times.)

Page 319: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-17

4.6. E120: S.G. calibration failure Item Description Detail S.G. calibration failed. Cause • The low and high S.G. calibration solutions were loaded into the opposite ports.

• The S.G. hydrometer is damaged. • Trouble occurred with the flow lines. • There was too little S.G. standard solutions. • The S.G. standard solutions are inadequate in specific gravity value. • The low and high solutions are not loaded in the appropriate ports of the sample rack.• A rack was not set. • The liquid sensor is damaged. • The calibration cell is dirty. • Electrical or mechanical trouble occurred in the pump drive unit.

Detection method • S.G. calibration was performed, but the specific gravity of the low solution resulted higher than that of the high solution.

• The liquid sensor could not detect the solution during S.G. calibration. • The S.G. standard solutions were outside the specified range.

Instrument reaction 1) A message appears on the display. 2) Measurement ends.

Remedy by user • Correctly place the low solution in port 1, and the high solution in port 2 on the sample rack. Then, retry S.G. calibration.

Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the S.G. hydrometer. • Replace the liquid sensor. • Check the flow lines and the pump drive unit.

Detailed information 1 001: The low solution was not loaded into the rack. 002: There was too little low solution. 003: The high solution was not loaded into the rack. 004: There was too little high solution. 005: The low and high solutions were loaded into the opposite ports. 006: There was no rack. 007: Other

Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this error occurred. Remarks

Page 320: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-18

4.7. E121: Turbidity calibration failure Item Description Detail Turbidity calibration failed. Cause • An inappropriate turbidity standard solution was used.

• The wrong value was input for the standard solution of turbidity calibration. • The turbidimeter or tintometer is damaged. • Trouble occurred with the flow lines. • There was too little turbidity standard solution. • There was no washing solution. (No blank measurement could be carried out.) • The liquid sensor is damaged. • Electrical or mechanical trouble occurred in the pump drive unit.

Detection method Turbidity was not detected above the specified level in turbidity calibration. Instrument reaction 1) A message appears on the display. Remedy by user None Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the turbidimeter or tintometer.

• Replace the liquid sensor. • Check the flow lines and the pump drive unit. • Use the turbidity standard solution correctly. • Set turbidity calibration values correctly. • Add washing solution.

Detailed information 1 001: There was little or no turbidity standard solution. 002: Other

Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this error occurred. Remarks This error occurs only during turbidity calibration in the service mode.

4.8. E122: Hb calibration failure Item Description Detail Hb calibration failed. Cause • An inadequate Hb standard solution was used.

• The wrong value was input for the standard solution of Hb calibration. • The turbidimeter or tintometer is damaged. • Trouble occurred with the flow lines. • There was too little Hb standard solution. • There was no washing solution. (No blank measurement could be carried out.) • The liquid sensor is damaged. • Electrical or mechanical trouble occurred in the pump drive unit.

Detection method Light absorbance was not detected above the specified level in Hb calibration. Instrument reaction 1) A message appears on the display. Remedy by user None Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the turbidimeter or tintometer.

• Replace the liquid sensor. • Check the flow lines and the pump drive unit. • Use the Hb standard solution correctly. • Set Hb calibration values correctly. • Add washing solution.

Detailed information 1 001: There was little or no Hb standard solution. 002: Other

Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this error occurred. Remarks This error occurs only during Hb calibration in the service mode.

Page 321: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-19

4.9. E130: Two-way communication error Item Description Detail Two-way communications failed. Cause • The communication settings of the instrument and host do not match.

• The communication cable is not connected. • The host does not have as high a processing capability as the instrument has. • Communications could not be established for some reason.

Detection method While performing measurement online, the instrument did not receive any instructions from the host.

Instrument reaction 1) A message appears on the display. 2) The instrument stops further sample aspiration. 3) Optical measurement is performed for test strips that are undergoing reactions. 4) Measurement ends.

Remedy by user • Check to see if the communication cable is connected correctly. Remedy by manufacturer • Set the communication settings correctly on both the instrument and host. Detailed information 1 001: Transmission status error

002: Transmission protocol error 003: Reception protocol error 004: Frame reception time-out

Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this error occurred. Remarks

4.10. E140: Test strip marker error Item Description Detail The test strip identified from the test strip marker read by the optical unit differed from the

set test strip. Cause • The wrong type of test strip was set.

• The feeder contains two or more types of test strips. • Test strips from earlier measurements remained in the feeder when it was loaded anew.

• Trouble occurred with the optical unit. • Optical unit LEDs are worn. • Test strips came out of place.

Detection method The type of test strip was identified by the optical unit by reading the test strip marker and compared against the set test strip. As a result, the test strip type differed.

Instrument reaction 1) A message appears on the display. 2) Measurement ends.

Remedy by user • Set test strips in the feeder correctly. Remedy by manufacturer • Readjust the optical unit.

• Check light intensity of the optical unit LEDs. • Readjust the test strip transport section.

Message None Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 Program line where this error occurred. Detailed information 3 Remarks

Page 322: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-20

5. Trouble 5.1. T999: Unknown trouble Item Description Detail A system failure occurred. Cause System failure Detection method The stop processing routine started. Instrument reaction 1. The program stops completely. Remedy by user Contact the distributor. Remedy by manufacturer Contact the development team. Detailed information 1 Information on program stopping Detailed information 2 Information on program stopping Detailed information 3 Information on program stopping Remarks Detailed information is displayed and printed.

5.2. T201: Data ROM trouble Item Description Detail A trouble occurred in the flash ROM that stores the parameter settings. Cause The main ROM was upgraded.

The parameter settings were corrupt. An electrical problem occurred with the board.

Detection method The checksum of the parameters in the flash ROM did not match. Instrument reaction 1) A message appears on the display.

2) The ROM is initialized. Remedy by user Contact the distributor. Remedy by manufacturer • Initialize the flash ROM and configure the parameter settings again.

• Replace the flash ROM and configure the parameter settings again. Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks

5.3. T202: Internal communication trouble Item Description Detail Internal communication trouble occurred. Cause • The sub CPU was installed incorrectly.

• The I2C address setting DIP switches of the PMC were set incorrectly. • The I2C communication cable was disconnected. • Electrical trouble occurred on the board.

Detection method A protocol error such as a time-out or high retry count occurred during I2C communications.

Instrument reaction 1) The program stops completely. 2) A message appears on the display.

Remedy by user Contact the distributor. Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the board.

• Check for a disconnected I2C communication cable. • Check the I2C address setting.

Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks If trouble occurs in communications with the panel CPU, a message does not appear on

the display, but the situation is indicated by the status LED.

Page 323: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-21

Page 324: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-22

5.4. T203: No calibration curve Item Description Detail The calibration curve information is incomplete. Cause • The calibration curve has not been set for the test strip.

• The calibration curve in the flash ROM was initialized. • Measurement was started without the flash ROM calibration curve being fully input. • The flash ROM is damaged.

Detection method Information on the selected test strip is insufficient. Instrument reaction 1) A message appears on the display. Remedy by user Contact the distributor. Remedy by manufacturer • Replace and initialize the flash ROM according to market specifications.

• Correct calibration curve information. Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks This check is made at the start of measurement.

5.5. T210: Test strip introduction section drive trouble Item Description Detail The test strip introduction mechanism did not work correctly. Cause • The transport tray was not installed correctly or installed at all.

• The test strips cannot be transported because the transport section is dirty or obstructed.

Detection method The test strip identification section did not detect the test strip. Instrument reaction 1) The instrument stops operation.

2) A message appears on the display. 3) The instrument stops further sample aspiration. 4) Measurement is performed for test strips that are undergoing reactions. 5) The instrument initializes itself.

Remedy by user • Install the transport tray correctly. • Clean the dirty transport section. • Remove the obstacles from the test strip transport section, if there are any. • If this trouble occurs frequently, contact the distributor.

Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the test strip identification section. • Readjust the test strip introduction mechanism.

Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks This trouble is detected if synchronization is off by 2 mm.

Page 325: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-23

5.6. T211: Test strip transport section drive trouble Item Description Detail The transport section did not work correctly. Cause • The DC motor drive unit was not adequately adjusted.

• The DC motor hit something that prevents it from turning. • Electrical or mechanical trouble occurred in the DC motor drive unit. • The positioning PI is damaged.

Detection method The initialization PI of the test strip transport section did not activate after the DC motor was driven for a set period of time.

Instrument reaction 1) The instrument stops operation. 2) A message appears on the display. 3) The instrument initializes itself.

Remedy by user • Check the test strip transport section. If the section is damaged, turn off the power and contact your distributor.

• Remove the test strips scattered on the analysis section. • If this trouble occurs frequently, contact the distributor.

Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the test strip transport initialization PI. • Readjust the mechanism.

Detailed information 1 001: Sensor detection trouble 002: The test strip is horizontally out of position.

Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks

5.7. T212: Test strip identification section drive trouble Item Description Detail The test strip identification section did not work correctly. Cause • Electrical trouble occurred with the test strip identification section or the PIs were not

adequately adjusted. • The test strip identification sensor is dirty or damaged. • The test strip identification sensor was not adequately adjusted. • The initialization PI of the test strip identification motor is dirty or damaged. • The test strip flip section of the feeder is clogged with test strips. • The test strip top-bottom detection sensor of the feeder is dirty or damaged. • The test strip was not fed from the feeder.

Detection method • The initialization PI was bright during initialization, but it did not turn dark after the test strip identification section drove the specified pulses in the initialization direction.

• When the initialization PI was dark, it did not turn bright after the test strip identification section drove the specified pulses in the opposite initialization direction.

• The pulse count difference between the initialization and return motions relative to the initialization PI equaled or exceeded the set pulse difference.

Instrument reaction 1) The instrument stops operation. 2) A message appears on the display. 3) Measurement is performed for test strips that are undergoing reactions. 4) The instrument initializes itself.

Remedy by user • Remove the clogged test strips from the test strip flip section of the feeder. Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the test strip identification sensor.

• Replace the test strip top-bottom detection sensor of the feeder. • Readjust the mechanism.

Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks This trouble is detected if synchronization is off by 2 mm.

Page 326: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-24

5.8. T220: Optical unit drive trouble Item Description Detail The optical unit did not work correctly. Cause • The transport tray is not installed correctly.

• The waste box is overflowing with used test strips that are blocking the measurement light and the optical unit movement.

• Electrical or mechanical trouble occurred with the optical unit drive. • Electrical trouble occurred with the initialization PI of the optical unit motor.

Detection method • The initialization PI was bright during initialization, but it did not turn dark after the optical unit drove the specified pulses in the initialization direction.

• When the initialization PI was dark, it did not turn bright after the optical unit drove the specified pulses in the opposite initialization direction.

• The pulse count difference between the initialization and return motions relative to the initialization PI equaled or exceeded the set pulse difference.

Instrument reaction 1) The instrument stops operation. 2) A message appears on the display. 3) The instrument initializes itself.

Remedy by user • Check for and remove anything that is obstructing optical unit drive. • Check the optical unit. If the optical unit is damaged, turn off the power and contact the distributor.

• Remove the test strips scattered on the analysis section. • If the waste box is full of test strips, empty it. • If this trouble occurs frequently, contact the distributor.

Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the initialization PI. • Readjust the mechanism.

Detailed information 1 001: Initialization failure 002: Operation failure

Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks This trouble is detected if synchronization is off by 4 mm.

Page 327: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-25

5.9. T221: A/D overflow Item Description Detail The A/D value of the optical unit overflowed. Cause • The transport tray is not installed correctly.

• Test strips were not set correctly in the optical unit because of trouble with the test strip transport section.

• The waste box is overflowing with used test strips that are blocking the measurement light and the optical unit movement.

• The white plate is dirty. • Mechanical trouble occurred with the test strip transport section. • Light intensity around the optical unit varied. • Electrical troubled occurred with the optical unit. • LEDs were not adequately adjusted.

Detection method Light measurement by the optical unit indicated that the value obtained from the A/D converter had overflowed.

Instrument reaction 1) The instrument stops operation. 2) A message appears on the display. 3) The instrument initializes itself.

Remedy by user • Install the transport tray correctly. • Remove the test strips or other obstacles that are blocking the measurement light and the optical unit movement.

• Remove the test strips scattered on the analysis section. • Clean or replace the white plate and perform a check measurement. • If this trouble occurs frequently, contact the distributor.

Remedy by manufacturer • Check for stray light around the optical unit. • Check light intensity of LEDs and adjust as necessary. • Replace the optical unit.

Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks

Page 328: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-26

5.10. T222: Optical unit trouble Item Description Detail • The A/D value obtained from optical measurement was not within the specified range.

• The dark A/D value obtained from optical measurement was not within the specified range.

Cause • Trouble such as a dirty white plate occurred. • Light intensity around the optical unit varied. • Electrical trouble occurred with the optical unit. • LEDs were not adequately adjusted. • The test strip was not transported correctly.

Detection method Wavelength data of the white plate was above the specified level. Instrument reaction 1) The instrument stops operation.

2) A message appears on the display. 3) The instrument initializes itself.

Remedy by user • Clean the white plate and perform a check measurement. • Remove the test strips scattered on the analysis section. • If this trouble occurs frequently, contact the distributor.

Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the white plate with a new one. • Check light intensity of LEDs and adjust as necessary. • Adjust the test strip transport section.

Detailed information 1 001: A/D value high limit exceeded 002: A/D value low limit exceeded 003: Dark A/D value high limit exceeded 004: Dark A/D value low limit exceeded

Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks

Page 329: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-27

5.11. T223: Optical unit undetected marker Item Description Detail The optical unit did not detect the test strip marker. Cause • The transport tray is not installed correctly.

• The waste box is overflowing with used test strips that are blocking the measurement light and the optical unit movement.

• Light intensity around the optical unit varied. • The test strip transport section did not deliver the test strip to the optical unit. • The test strip was upside-down at the optical unit. • The test strip was out of position (front, back, left or right direction) at the optical unit. • Electrical or mechanical trouble occurred with the optical unit or the test strip transport section.

• Electrical trouble occurred with the optical unit or LEDs were not adequately adjusted.Detection method A test strip was not detected at the optical unit when there should be.

The black marker of the test strip was detected in the order or white-black-white. Instrument reaction 1) The instrument stops operation.

2) A message appears on the display. 3) The instrument initializes itself.

Remedy by user • Install the transport tray correctly. • Remove the test strips scattered on the analysis section. • If the waste box is full of test strips, empty it. • If this trouble occurs frequently, contact the distributor.

Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the optical unit. • Check for stray light around the optical unit. • Adjust the test strip transport section.

Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks

Page 330: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-28

5.12. T230: Feeder drive trouble Item Description Detail • The feeder did not initialize.

• The feeder is clogged with test strips. • The feeder did not move to the test strip flip section. • The test strip flip section did not initialize.

Cause • An abnormal test strip was loaded. • The feeder was not adequately adjusted. • The test strip positioning PI was not adequately adjusted. • The drum rotation initialization PI was not adequately adjusted. • Test strip waste has accumulated in the feeder. • Electrical or mechanical trouble occurred with the feeder drive.

Detection method • The test strip positioning PI of the feeder did not activate. • Test strip clogging was not cleared within the specified amount of time. • The test strip flip initialization PI of the test strip flip section did not activate.

Instrument reaction 1) The instrument stops operation. 2) A message appears on the display. 3) Measurement is performed for test strips that are undergoing reactions. 4) The instrument initializes itself.

Remedy by user • Check the feeder, and remove the clogged test strips from the feeder. • Check the feeder. If the feeder is damaged, turn off the power, and contact the distributor.

• If this trouble occurs frequently, contact the distributor. Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the test strip positioning PI of the feeder.

• Replace the drum rotation initialization PI of the feeder. • Replace the test strip flip initialization PI of the test strip flip section.

Detailed information 1 001: Feeder initialization failure 003: Feeder operation failure 004: Flip section initialization failure

Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks Lost synchronization is not detected.

Page 331: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-29

5.13. T240: Nozzle drive trouble Item Description Detail • The nozzle up-down mechanism did not move correctly.

• The nozzle front-back mechanism did not move correctly. Cause • The nozzle drive unit pulses were not adequately adjusted.

• The nozzle is bent. • The motor hit something that threw out synchronization. • Electrical or mechanical trouble occurred with the nozzle drive unit. • The respective initialization PIs are damaged. • The interlock PI of the nozzle front-back mechanism is damaged.

Detection method • When the initialization PI was bright, it did not turn dark after the nozzle mechanism drove the specified pulses in the initialization direction.

• When the initialization PI was dark, it did not turn bright after the nozzle mechanism drove the specified pulses in the opposite initialization direction.

• The pulse count difference between the initialization and return motions relative to the initialization PI equaled or exceeded the set pulse difference.

• The interlock PI did not turn dark despite the nozzle being above the washing bath. Instrument reaction 1) The instrument stops operation.

2) A message appears on the display. 3) Measurement is performed for test strips that are undergoing reactions. (Only if the

nozzle stops at the sampling position) 4) The instrument initializes itself.

Remedy by user • Check the nozzle. If the nozzle is damaged, turn off the power, and contact the distributor.

• If this trouble occurs frequently, contact the distributor. Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the nozzle.

• Readjust the nozzle drive unit. • Replace the initialization PI. • Replace the interlock PI.

Detailed information 1 001: Nozzle up-down initialization failure 002: Nozzle up-down operation failure 003: Nozzle front-back initialization failure 004: Nozzle front-back operation failure 005: Nozzle front-back interlock failure

Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks Up-Down: This trouble is detected if up-down synchronization is off by 125 pulses.

Front-Back: None (Only interlock)

Page 332: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-30

5.14. T241: Sampling trouble Item Description Detail Incorrect sampling occurred consecutive times.

There is no washing solution in the S.G. cell. Cause • Consecutive sample tubes had an insufficient volume of sample: less than 2 mL or a

level lower than 40 mm. • There was 2 mL (4 cm )or less of washing solution. • The liquid sensor is damaged. • Electrical or mechanical trouble occurred in the nozzle drive. • The nozzle drive unit was not adequately adjusted.

Detection method No sample was detected 5 consecutive times in sample detection. Instrument reaction 1) The instrument stops operation.

2) A message appears on the display. 3) Measurement is performed for test strips that are undergoing reactions. 4) The instrument initializes itself.

Remedy by user • Check sample volume. • If this trouble occurs frequently, contact the distributor.

Remedy by manufacturer • Readjust the nozzle and/or pump mechanisms. • Adjust or replace the liquid sensor.

Detailed information 1 001: Sample aspiration trouble 002: Staining trouble

Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks

5.15. T250: S.G. hydrometer trouble Item Description Detail The output value of the S.G. hydrometer was outside the specified range. Cause • The S.G. hydrometer is not connected correctly. Detection method • A communication error occurred with the S.G. hydrometer. Instrument reaction 1) The instrument stops operation.

2) A message appears on the display. 3) The instrument initializes itself.

Remedy by user • Contact the distributor. Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the S.G. hydrometer.

• Check the connector of the S.G. hydrometer. Detailed information 1 001: S.G. hydrometer communication trouble Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks

Page 333: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-31

5.16. T251: Turbidimeter trouble Item Description Detail • The scattered light output of the turbidimeter was outside the specified range.

• The dark value of the scattered light of the turbidimeter exceeded the specified value.• The transmitted light output of the turbidimeter was outside the specified range. • The dark value of the transmitted light of the turbidimeter exceeded the specified value.

Cause • The turbid/Hb/color cell is dirty, • The tubing is clogged. • The flow lines were wrongly connected. • LED light intensity was insufficient. • Adjustments from the electronic volumes was not adequate. • Electrical or mechanical trouble occurred with the pump drive unit. • Electrical or mechanical trouble occurred with the turbidimeter. • Adjustments from the electronic volumes or other setting devices was not adequate.

Detection method • The scattered light output of the turbidimeter exceeded the specified value. • The scattered light output of the turbidimeter undershot the specified value. • The scattered light dark output of the turbidimeter exceeded the specified value. • The transmitted light output of the turbidimeter exceeded the specified value. • The transmitted light output of the turbidimeter undershot the specified value. • The transmitted light dark output of the turbidimeter exceeded the specified value.

Instrument reaction 1) The instrument stops operation. 2) A message appears on the display. 3) Measurement is performed for test strips that are undergoing reactions. 4) The instrument initializes itself.

Remedy by user • Check the pump and flow lines are connected correctly. • Wash external parts. • If this trouble occurs frequently, contact the distributor.

Remedy by manufacturer • Readjust the pump. • Check the flow lines for clogging. • Replace the turbidimeter. • Make adjustments from the electronic volumes.

Detailed information 1 001: Scattered light range exceeded 002: Scattered light range undershot 003: Scattered light dark range exceeded 004: Transmitted light range exceeded 005: Transmitted light range undershot 006: Transmitted light dark range exceeded

Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks

Page 334: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-32

5.17. T252: Tintometer trouble Item Description Detail • The light intensity of the tintometer was outside the specified range.

• The dark value of the tintometer was outside the specified range. Cause • The turbid/Hb/color cell is dirty.

• The tubing is clogged. • The flow lines are wrongly connected. • Light intensity is insufficient. • Adjustments from the electronic volumes was not adequate. • Electrical or mechanical trouble occurred with the pump drive unit. • Electrical or mechanical trouble occurred with the tintometer.

Detection method • The 565 nm output of the tintometer exceeded the specified level. • The 565 nm output of the tintometer undershot the specified level. • The 565 nm dark value of the tintometer exceeded the specified level.

Instrument reaction 1) The instrument stops operation. 2) A message appears on the display. 3) Measurement is performed for test strips that are undergoing reactions. 4) The instrument initializes itself.

Remedy by user • Check the pump and flow lines are connected correctly. • Wash external parts. • If this trouble occurs frequently, contact the distributor.

Remedy by manufacturer • Readjust the pump. • Check the flow lines for clogging. • Replace the tintometer. • Make adjustments from the electronic volumes.

Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks

Page 335: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-33

5.18. T260: Washing solution pump trouble Item Description Detail The washing solution pump did not work correctly. Cause • Electrical or mechanical trouble occurred with the washing solution pump.

• The initialization PI of the washing solution pump is damaged. Detection method • When the initialization PI was bright, it did not turn dark after the washing solution pump

drove the specified pulses in the initialization direction. • When the initialization PI was dark, it did not turn bright after the washing solution pump drove the specified pulses in the opposite initialization direction.

• The pulse count difference between the initialization and return motions relative to the initialization PI equaled or exceeded the set pulse difference.

Instrument reaction 1) The instrument stops operation. 2) A message appears on the display. 3) Measurement is performed for test strips that are undergoing reactions. 4) The instrument initializes itself.

Remedy by user • Replace the cap seal. • Check the pump and flow lines are connected correctly. • If this trouble occurs frequently, contact the distributor.

Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the washing solution pump. Detailed information 1 001: Initialization failure

002: Operation failure Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks This trouble is detected if synchronization is off by 600 pulses.

5.19. T261: Sampling pump trouble Item Description Detail The sampling pump did not work correctly. Cause • Electrical or mechanical trouble occurred with the sampling pump.

• The initialization PI of the sampling pump is damaged. Detection method • When the initialization PI was bright, it did not turn dark after the sampling pump drove

the specified pulses in the initialization direction. • When the initialization PI was dark, it did not turn bright after the sampling pump drove the specified pulses in the opposite initialization direction.

• The pulse count difference between the initialization and return motions relative to the initialization PI equaled or exceeded the set pulse difference.

Instrument reaction 1) The instrument stops operation. 2) A message appears on the display. 3) Measurement is performed for test strips that are undergoing reactions. 4) The instrument initializes itself.

Remedy by user • Replace the cap seal. • Check the pump and flow lines are connected correctly. • If this trouble occurs frequently, contact the distributor.

Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the sampling pump. Detailed information 1 001: Initialization failure

002: Operation failure Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks This trouble is detected if synchronization is off by 400 pulses.

Page 336: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-34

5.20. T270: Measurement lever drive trouble Item Description Detail The measurement lever of the sampler did not move correctly.

The measurement lever did not feed 1 port correctly. Cause • A rack was forced into the sampler.

• The motor hit something that threw out synchronization. • Electrical or mechanical trouble occurred with the measurement lever. • Measurement lever drive was not adequately adjusted. • The initialization PI of the measurement lever is damaged. • The interlock PI of the measurement lever is damaged.

Detection method • When the initialization PI was bright, it did not turn dark after the measurement lever drove the specified pulses in the initialization direction.

• When the initialization PI was dark, it did not turn bright after the measurement lever drove the specified pulses in the opposite initialization direction.

• The pulse count difference between the initialization and return motions relative to the initialization PI equaled or exceeded the set pulse difference.

• The port detection PI did not turn bright after the measurement lever drove the pulses equal to 1 port.

Instrument reaction 1) The instrument stops operation. 2) A message appears on the display. 3) Measurement is performed for test strips that are undergoing reactions. 4) The instrument initializes itself.

Remedy by user • Take the sample racks out of the sampler. • Check the sampler. If the sampler is damaged, turn off the power and contact your distributor.

• If this trouble occurs frequently, contact the distributor. Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the initialization PI.

• Replace the interlock PI of the measurement lever. Detailed information 1 001: Initialization failure

002: Operation failure 003: 1 port feed failure

Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks

Page 337: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-35

5.21. T271: Return lever drive trouble Item Description Detail The return-side lever of the sampler did not move correctly. Cause • A rack was forced into the sampler.

• The motor hit something that threw out synchronization. • Electrical or mechanical trouble occurred with the return-side lever. • Return-side lever drive was not adequately adjusted. • The initialization PI of the measurement lever is damaged.

Detection method • When the initialization PI was bright, it did not turn dark after the return-side lever drove the specified pulses in the initialization direction.

• When the initialization PI was dark, it did not turn bright after the return-side lever drove the specified pulses in the opposite initialization direction.

• The pulse count difference between the initialization and return motions relative to the initialization PI equaled or exceeded the set pulse difference.

Instrument reaction 1) The instrument stops operation. 2) A message appears on the display. 3) Measurement is performed for test strips that are undergoing reactions. 4) The instrument initializes itself.

Remedy by user • Take the sample racks out of the sampler. • Check the sampler. If the sampler is damaged, turn off the power and contact the distributor.

• If this trouble occurs frequently, contact the distributor. Remedy by manufacturer ・Replace the initialization PI. Detailed information 1 001: Initialization failure

002: Operation failure Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks

5.22. T272: Loading side full Item Description Detail The sampler was fully loaded with 5 racks. Cause • Another rack was added to the loading side.

• Racks could not be vertically moved on the loading side of the sampler. • The rack ID detection PI is damaged.

Detection method The rack ID reading sensor detected a rack after the introduction belt on the loading side turned in reverse.

Instrument reaction 1) The instrument stops operation. 2) A message appears on the display. 3) Measurement is performed for test strips that are undergoing reactions. 4) The instrument initializes itself.

Remedy by user • Take the sample racks out of the loading side of the sampler. • If this trouble occurs frequently, contact the distributor.

Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the rack ID detection PI. Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks

Page 338: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix 4 Error/Trouble AX-4030 Service Manual

AP4-36

5.23. T280: Overflow Item Description Detail The washing bath overflowed.

The tubing is detached. Cause • The drain pump is damaged.

• The overflow sensor of the trap bottle is damaged. • The flow lines are clogged. • The pressure reducing pump is damaged. • The tubing was detached. • The S.G. cell is not securely set.

Detection method The overflow sensor tripped. Instrument reaction 1) The instrument stops operation.

2) A message appears on the display. 3) Measurement is performed for test strips that are undergoing reactions. 4) The instrument initializes itself.

Remedy by user • Replace the flow lines of the drain pump. • Contact the distributor.

Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the drain pump. • Replace the overflow sensor. • Check the flow lines for clogging. • Reconnect any disconnected flow lines. • Replace the pressure-reducing pump.

Detailed information 1 001: Pressure-reducing bottle 002: Washing bath 003: S.G. hydrometer

Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks

5.24. T290: Cover open Item Description Detail One of the exterior covers is open. Cause • The user opened one of the exterior covers

• The cover open/close detector for one of the exterior covers is damaged. Detection method The cover open/close detector tripped. Instrument reaction 1) The instrument stops operation.

2) A message appears on the display. 3) The instrument initializes itself.

Remedy by user • Close the cover. Remedy by manufacturer • Replace the cover open/close detector. Detailed information 1 None Detailed information 2 None Detailed information 3 Program line where this trouble occurred. Remarks There are 4 covers: the front cover, maintenance cover, side cover, or feeder protective

cover.

Page 339: Service Manual Aution Max AX-4030

Appendix AX-4030 Service Manual